Skip to main content

The Sounds of Silence

In a recent posting I touched on the wit and wisdom of jazz pianist Thelonious Monk, citing his profound and poetic definition of the word genius (“the one most like himself”).

Musical annotation.
Even non-musicians can play this!

This time around I’d like to take a closer look at another all-too-true Monk aphorism: “What you don’t play can be more important than what you do play.” A decade after Monk uttered these immortal words, Steely Dan’s Donald Fagen restated the theme when he reportedly instructed the group’s backing musicians to pay more attention to the space between the notes than the notes themselves.

Of course, for centuries beforehand, classical composers were, to great effect, employing the stark contrast between lots of notes and few (or none) of them. Some scholars say that it was Ludwig Von Beethoven who pioneered the method. His Eighth Symphony, for example, has been described as “compression and containment … the art of interruption and sudden spillover. Cadences stop, start and stop again; they play games with our sense of order.” From LVB’s masterpieces to the finale of Sibelius’ Symphony No. 5, with its huge closing chords and even huger gaps of silence, to Barber’s Adagio for Strings, with its long gasp of nothingness that presages the orchestra’s timid re-entry, the message is clear: Less can be more. (A concept taken to its absolute extreme with John Cage’s 4’33”, which consists of four minutes and 33 seconds of … absolutely nothing.)

Kind of Blue album cover.

Probably the musician who best characterized this approach was the enigmatic jazz trumpeter Miles Davis, who early in his career developed an improvisational style that was based on the way Picasso used a canvas, where the focus was not on the objects themselves, but the space between them. As best-selling author (and fellow Yamaha blogger) Dr. Daniel J. Levitin has written, “Miles … described the most important part of his solos as the empty space between notes, the “air” that he placed between one note and the next. Knowing precisely when to hit the next note, and allowing the listener time to anticipate it, is a hallmark of Davis’ genius.” Nowhere is this more apparent than in Miles’ breakthrough 1959 album Kind of Blue, where his methodically disciplined phrasings are interspersed with long silences that are sometimes as long as the phrases themselves. Yet his solos on that album are nothing short of riveting, particularly in the way they contrast with the busier passages played by John Coltrane and Julian “Cannonball” Adderly — fellow jazz legends who acted as sidemen on this seminal recording, along with pianist/composer Bill Evans. Even if you don’t consider yourself a fan of jazz, you owe it to yourself to give this gorgeous, deeply meditative album a listen.

Photo of Slowhand album cover by Eric Clapton.

In the rock world, most soloists are, of course, guitar players, and they generally pride themselves on their ability to cram as many notes as possible into each moment. (As the old joke goes, “What’s the difference between a shredding guitarist and an Uzi? An Uzi can only repeat itself 10,000 times a second.”) One exception to that rule is Eric Clapton, who in his younger days was nicknamed “Slowhand” for the way he eschewed rapid-fire solos in favor of a more languid — but no less effective — approach. (Yes, he may have temporarily abandoned this tactic during his stint with ’60s supergroup Cream, but one could argue that his lead lines were often less dense than the bass underpinnings being woven by Jack Bruce.) For examples of how restraint can work better than bombast, check out Clapton’s lead work on his hit single “Wonderful Tonight” or his (uncredited) solo on The Beatles’ “While My Guitar Gently Weeps.”

But it isn’t just in terms of soloing that silence is key. It can be a powerful tool in musical arrangement, too. As an example, check out “All Right Now,” a 1970 hit for the English rock group Free. The way the verses jump out at you is not only due to the stripped-down instrumentation accompanying Paul Rodger’s vocal (just drums and one solitary guitar — not even bass) but because of the long gaps between the guitar chords, populated with just a hint of percussion. When the choruses and solos kick in with fuller instrumentation (including bass), the contrast is an attention-grabber.

Speaking of bass, the best four- and five-string players know the importance of leaving space for the vocals and melodic instruments. Session bassist Chuck Rainey is perhaps the perfect example, renowned for a spare approach that supports but never detracts from the central melodic content. No coincidence, then, that Rainey appeared frequently on Steely Dan recordings, having clearly won the approval of the aforesaid Donald Fagen.

Mozart was once asked what the greatest effect in music was, and his reply was, “No music.” Pithy, yes, but something worth keeping in mind the next time you begin crafting a song or musical arrangement … or the moment you step into the spotlight to take a solo.

 

Check out Howard’s other postings.

Five Reasons Why You Should Practice On Electronic Drums

I’m a drummer who has played acoustic drums on gigs for as long as I can remember, but there’s no escaping the fact that practicing on acoustic drums can sometimes be a challenge. Let’s take a look at the top five reasons why you should consider practicing on electronic drums instead.

1. They Allow You to Practice Quietly.

Young man playing electronic drums with headphones.

Acoustic drums and cymbals were designed to be hit with a piece of wood. Unfortunately, the great sounds they make as a result of being struck aren’t as controllable as our family members and neighbors might like … and, sadly, there are no volume knobs on acoustic drums.

Electronic drums — also referred to as E-drums — solve this problem by actually providing such a knob and allowing you to use headphones or earphones to play as loud as you want without anyone else hearing you do your best imitation of Tommy Aldridge, John Bonham or [insert name of favorite drummer here].

The only audible sound is of the stick hitting the drum and cymbal pads and the kick pedal beater hitting the kick pad (unless you are using a beater-less kick pedal, which reduces the volume to a whisper). This comes in handy with late-night practicing or apartment living.

Having total control of your overall volume with the push of a button or twist of a knob also helps to protect your ears from damage — something that is harder to manage when playing loud cymbals on an acoustic set.

In addition, playing E-drums with headphones or earphones encourages kids to be more creative and try things they wouldn’t normally try on acoustic drums (such as playing different styles of music) since they are the only ones hearing it.

2. You Can Record Yourself Easily.

Laptop with edrum control panel connected.

When playing drums, it’s sometimes hard to tell if you’re actually playing “in time.” Recording yourself playing along to a pre-recorded song or a metronome and listening back is a great way to tell if you are speeding up, slowing down or playing right on the money.

Some E-drum modules (the “brain” of the kit) have built-in recording options that make it quite easy. You can also connect a module such as the Yamaha DTX-PRO to your computer via a USB, or just use the analog outputs of the module to record into your favorite DAW (Digital Audio Workstation) software.

Youth using app on phone.

My favorite way to record is with an app such as Rec’n’Share, which is compatible with a number of Yamaha electronic drum kits, including the DTX6 Series. Simply install this free app onto your iPhone® or iPad® and connect the device to your module. This allows you to use the pro sound of your drum module along with your phone’s camera to record a top-notch video.

Electronic drum kit as seen from above.
Yamaha DTX6K3-X electronic drum kit.

3. Built-In Timing and Training Exercises.

Some drum modules have built-in training and learning exercises. These valuable practice tools enable you to improve your playing skills in a fun and challenging way and makes practicing more enjoyable, thus allowing you to immerse yourself in the limitless excitement of drumming. The module’s features can include:

  • Metronome – This is the most common and most-utilized tool offered by a module. You can play along with the metronome by hearing the “click” and/or by seeing it. Either way, this allows you to determine if you are ahead of or behind the beat.
  • Play-Along Songs – You can play along to recorded songs in the module’s memory or hook up your own music player. Pop, rock, funk, metal, hip hop, EDM, jazz and latin are some of the styles of songs commonly offered by most modules.
  • Training Modes – These exercises are designed to make you a better player, faster. They’re a fun way to learn to read drum music notation, play with dynamics and develop your sense of timing.

4. Compact Size.

The footprint of most electronic drum sets is smaller than that of an acoustic set. This means that you can set up your E-drums in rooms with limited space and store them in a closet or under the bed when not in use.

E-drum pads are also smaller in size compared to acoustic drums, so they can be easily adjusted to fit your own height and unique setup. For example, tom pads can be closer together and lower to the ground. On acoustic sets, the toms typically have to sit on top of the bass drum and cannot go any lower than the top of the bass drum.

Since E-drums are so compact, they are lighter and more portable than an acoustic drum set. This comes in handy if you do a lot of traveling and want to take your drums with you.

Young man carrying a folded-up electronic drum set.

5. Sounds, Sounds and MORE Sounds!

Practicing on an acoustic drum set gives you one particular overall sound that, aside from tuning your drums, is not going to change much. But with an electronic drum kit, you get top-notch, studio-quality sounds recorded with expensive microphones and effects like reverb and delay that you would have to spend a fortune to reproduce on an acoustic set.

Think it’s complicated? It’s not. Actually, finding your way around an electronic drum module is quite easy. Just by pushing a few buttons you can tune every drum and cymbal higher or lower in pitch, edit or alter sounds and effects and put custom kits together.

Most modules have hundreds of internal sounds and the ability to load in your own custom samples. Having that many different drum and percussion sounds and effects available at the push of a button — and also being able to play hand percussion on your pads — allows you to explore styles and genres of music you normally might not play.

Choose the E-drum kit that is right for you and that has the features that best suit your needs. Your neighbors will thank you!

Click here for more information about Yamaha electronic drums.

Click here for more information about Yamaha DTX6 Series electronic drums.

 

Snare Drum Warm-Up, Part 5

The fifth and final installment in our series about creating the ideal warm-up routine.

The previous four blog articles in this series got your hands moving and introduced accent patterns, wrist lifts, and flams. Let’s move on now to rolls.

Element #5: Rolls

Rolls are arguably one of the most difficult elements of playing percussion. I like to incorporate double and triple/multiple bounce rolls into my warm-ups so I can work on my fine motor skills. I generally do these exercises for 30 seconds and then switch hands. Make sure that once you start you don’t change the tempo:

Musical annotation.

Once your hands are warmed up, it’s time for the long roll. The key to long rolls is to relax. Start with a minute for each long roll and build up to 4 – 5 minutes. This is also a great exercise when you are watching TV or YouTube:

Musical annotation.

Use a metronome on the first set of exercises to maintain a steady tempo. The rolls are the final exercise in a well-rounded warm-up.

For more roll exercises, check out my previous blog post “How Do You Roll.”

Creating a warm-up routine is an individual process and what works for me will not necessarily work for everyone. Feel free to create your own routine! 

 

Check out the previous postings in our Snare Drum Warm-Up series:

Part 1: Warming up the big muscles

Part 2: Transitioning to the small muscles

Part 3: Accent patterns and wrist lifts

Part 4: Adding flams to the equation

 

Five Ways SURROUND:AI™ Enhances Horror Films

It’s been over 40 years and I still get chills when I hear “Tubular Bells,” the theme song from the 1973 horror classic The Exorcist.

Sound evokes powerful emotions, and horror movies in particular make the most of this phenomenon. Beyond terrifying visual imagery, sound is the nail in the coffin that destroys your last shred of composure and gives you the willies long after the movie is over.

For those of you who like a little fright on Halloween night — or any night, for that matter — watching horror movies at home is a great escape.

A 5.1- or 7.1-channel surround sound system is a must for movie lovers, and Surround:AI™, a breakthrough technology in the latest line of Yamaha AV receivers, brings artificial intelligence to home theater sound. Surround:AI automatically adjusts audio parameters for each scene in a movie, giving you the best entertainment experience possible.

In real time, Surround:AI analyzes and optimizes scenes to isolate and focus your attention on the faintest footstep and whispered dialogue in your center channel speaker, then expands the sound field to your surround speakers to produce the maximum effect of the whine of the chain saw and the panicked scream in the jump scare that follows. Surround:AI perfectly accentuates the switch from normalcy to terror that is the hallmark of horror movies.

So go grab a blanket to hide behind, then watch and listen to how Surround:AI enhances these bone-chilling movie moments:

1.  Shower Scene — Psycho (1960)

This iconic scene from director Alfred Hitchcock’s black and white classic features the horrifying screech of violins in time with deadly knife stabs — all against the mundane backdrop of water spraying from a shower head. A good reason to choose shower doors over shower curtains every time! Check it out here.

2.  Shark Eats Boy — Jaws (1975)

John Williams’ Oscar-winning score portends the approach of the great white shark in Steven Spielberg’s thriller so artfully it might not need anything else to set the mood. But with the innocent sounds of swimmers splashing in the water and Olivia Newton-John honestly declaring her love on the radio in the background, the contrasting blend of elements makes it seem like just another day at the beach … till it’s not. Check it out here.

3.  Chest Burster Scene — Alien (1979)

An ordinary meal among crewmates on a spaceship turns into a landmark scene in horror filmdom. Cheerful banter and the clinking of dinnerware gives way to terrified screams, then stunned silence. You’ll never think of doing the Heimlich maneuver on anyone again. Check it out here.

4.  Hypnosis Scene — Get Out (2017)

Here’s another entry in the “Making Ordinary Sounds Terrifying” category. The simple sound of the spoon stirring the tea in Jordan Peele’s Oscar-nominated directorial debut becomes nails on a chalkboard in this scene. Can you get off your couch or are you in the Sunken Place? Check it out here.

5.   A Father Does His Duty – A Quiet Place (2018)

Spoiler alert: Grab a tissue before clicking this link. There is a lot of silence in John Krasinski’s breakout directing turn, and this scene shows just how much impact a single sound can have. Check it out here.

 

Now that you’re in the mood, cue up your favorite horror movie on your surround sound system and get the most out of every scary moment … from the safety of your own couch.

Using Registration Memory

One of the features of my CVP Clavinova that I use on a daily basis is called “Registration Memory.” This allows me to save (“register”) all of my favorite sound combinations and panel settings for later recall by simply pressing a single button. In this article, we’ll take a detailed look at how this works.

In much the same way you can save your favorite radio stations as presets on your car’s radio (rather than manually dialing them in every time), you can create your favorite sound combinations and assign them to eight dedicated buttons right on Clavinova’s front panel. All you have to do is press the MEMORY button just to the left of those eight buttons, then press the desired button (1-8) you want to save it to:

Graphic.

This is not actually a new concept for keyboards — it’s actually a throwback to an idea implemented on pipe organs. On the organ, “registration” is the act of choosing and combining stops (a set of pipes producing a similar tone) in order to produce a particular sound. It was a system designed to store specific organ sounds so that they could be recalled instantaneously by the player during live performance. It usually consisted of several numbered buttons situated in the space between the manuals (the keyboards), allowing the organist to change registrations on the fly. On a Clavinova, these buttons are conveniently located right above where the right hand normally plays, allowing for easy access during performance.

Yamaha further expanded upon this concept by allowing you to specify which parameters are saved to each button. The factory default setting includes sounds, volumes, effects and more. However, you can also add things like Songs and Vocal Harmony settings for instant recall of your favorite songs or harmonies.

Alternatively, you can reduce the number of parameters saved to these buttons. This allows for some unique possibilities and more flexibility. The list of parameters that can be registered is automatically displayed when you press the MEMORY button, before you select buttons 1 – 8.  Simply enter or remove checkmarks by touching the desired items. Items having checkmarks will be registered:

Graphic.

This can be a great “performance saving” feature. For example, let’s say you want to transpose the instrument up four half-steps in the middle of a song. Normally, this would require four separate taps on the Transpose (+) button on the Clavinova panel. Instead, why not uncheck all of the parameters except Transpose, and create one Registration Memory button that leaves Transpose at 0 and a second one that saves Transpose at +4? Much easier!

The settings for up to eight Registration Memory buttons is saved within a Bank, and you can create as many Banks as you want:

Graphic.

To make the feature even more useful, it’s a good idea to assign helpful names to both the Banks and the individual Registration memories. Often I name entire banks with the name of the song I am performing. The Clavinova automatically alphabetizes the titles of the banks, so they’re easy to locate.

Another tip: Try creating a single bank for each song you will be performing. This will allow you to use the memories to take you through the song structure. For example, you can use button #1 for the first verse, button #2 for the chorus, button #3 for the second verse, button # 4 for the bridge, etc.

There are many benefits to Registration Memory, no matter how the instrument is used. It allows performers to eliminate those awkward silences between songs, allowing them to be ready for the next one in the set with the touch of a button. Songwriters will appreciate the ability to instantly recall the Voice combinations and setups you had in that moment of inspiration, enabling them to pick up exactly where you left off without spending time searching. No wonder it’s one of my favorite Clavinova features!

(Note that, in addition to the CVP Clavinova, Registration Memory is found on the CSP Clavinova and CLP Clavinova, as well as on Yamaha Arranger keyboards — even on some portables and digital pianos through the use of the Smart Pianist app.)

 

Check out these related blog articles:

Learn to Play Your Favorite Songs

How to Add New Songs to Your CSP

Kooky Karaoke

Getting the Most Out of Audio to Score

Yamaha Smart Pianist App Version 2.0

Which Digital Piano Is Right for Me?

“Breaking Amish” with My Yamaha FG-TA

I own a lot of guitars. As a guitar-centric TV composer, I need to have many different sounds at my fingertips and I rely on my instruments to provide a wide palette of sonic options for whatever show I’m working on.

The Yamaha FG-TA TransAcoustic guitar, with its unique built-in reverb and chorus, can literally do what no other guitar in my collection can do, making it an invaluable tool in my creative arsenal. Simply pressing a button on top of the FG-TA causes a small metal disk inside the body called an “actuator” to vibrate in response to the strings. Those vibrations are then conveyed to the guitar body and come out of the sound hole along with the natural sound of the instrument. To control the amount and depth of the resulting reverb and chorus, all you have to do is turn up the associated control knobs atop the guitar. In just seconds, you’ve got something special going: a vibe, something that is very important to my compositions.

I was recently asked to compose several cues for the TLC Network reality show “Breaking Amish.” Some of the scenes in the show are moody and unsettling, and so I reached for my FG-TA to elicit those feelings.

Acoustic guitar on desk next to laptop.

Since the guitar has a built-in pickup, I can output the signal to outboard effects as well, taking things a step further. For this cue, I started by plugging the FG-TA into my trusty Line 6 Helix® guitar processor, and connected the left and right outputs to my DAW. I then placed an omnidirectional microphone directly in front of the guitar to capture the natural sound of the instrument, for a total of three channels.

For the first pass, I engaged both the reverb and chorus effects on the FG-TA. These effects were not only picked up by the microphone (since they come out of the sound hole), but were also sent into the Helix via the guitar’s direct output. Using a patch that I modified with the unit’s onscreen editor (shown below), I added a bit of dynamic compression, as well as some delay (set to 69 beats per second, which was the tempo of the cue) and a little additional reverb. Using the Helix panner, I split the stereo signal hard left and right, giving me independent control over the effects coming from each side:

Screenshot.

The combination of the Helix output and the microphone picking up the built-in FG-TA effects gave me the vibe I was looking for. Here’s what that first pass sounded like:

One of the techniques that I like to use to thicken guitar tracks is to double-track the first pass. Sure, I could just copy and paste the sound, but that’s just artificial stereo. I much prefer the natural sonics resulting from the inevitable imperfections of the second pass. In this case, I disabled the TA effect, keeping just the Helix effects enabled, to create a slightly different sound than the first pass:

It’s easy to hear the difference between the two takes. The guitar in the first pass, with the TA reverb and chorus enabled as well as the Helix effects, is deeper and wetter. To complement that, the guitar in the second pass (with only the Helix effects) is drier and more upfront. Together, they create a nice emotional soundscape for the cue.

To create even more of a mood, I did a third pass using an EBow, which is a hand-held, battery-powered electronic device you hold up against the strings to cause them to vibrate. For this pass, I played the FG-TA with a slide and used only the output of the Helix, adding a touch of modulation to the sound for some extra movement. This created a pad-like sound which added to the overall unsettling feel of the music:

For planning and layout in the mix, I had the first pass (the guitar with the TA effects) panned primarily to the right, with the microphone just right of center, one Helix channel far right, and the other at about 11 o’clock. For the second pass, I did the opposite, panning it primarily to the left. I then panned the third pass (the guitar/Helix effect with the EBow) at around 11 and 2 o’clock:

Screenshot.

Here’s the full mix, including all three passes of the guitar, as well as some added bass and percussion:

Along with the percussive groove, they gave the cue just what was needed for the show: an emotional, slightly uncomfortable but cool-sounding vibe — all thanks to the built-in effects and overall great sound of the FG-TA.

Photographs courtesy of the author.

 

Click here for more information about the Yamaha FG-TA TransAcoustic Guitar.

Fix Winds Instruments in a Pinch

As a school band director, you take on many roles, including instrument doctor. For students renting an instrument, the dealer most likely offers maintenance and repair insurance.

Though insurance is a great investment in the long term, in reality, problems almost always occur at the wrong time or at the last minute.

Here are some pointers for short-term fixes to help you get a wind instrument playing well enough for a concert or competition without making the actual final repair more expensive.

THE YAMAHA EDUCATOR NEWSLETTER: Join to receive a round-up of our latest articles and programs!

Get Educated

Most educators have experience with the basics of either brass instruments or woodwinds but usually not both. You can find many videos on YouTube and elsewhere that show repair and maintenance for instruments. Be careful because while some have good advice, others are questionable in content. The Band Instrument Repair program at Minnesota State College Southeast in Red Wing, Minnesota, has a series of videos on YouTube with solid information.

You can also learn band instrument repair and maintenance by taking college courses that can be applied toward continuing education requirements. Or consider a part-time job at a music store during the summer to immerse yourself in a shop situation.

Seek Expert Resources

Develop a relationship with your local school service sales representative and repair shop. They can help you stretch your repair budget and provide parts for last-minute needs. They can also help you purchase some needed supplies to stock in your band room.

Assemble a Kit

items to stock in a winds repair kit -- screwdrivers, spring hook, blue painter's tape, cable tie, non-latex bandage, lubricant.

Here are some specific tools that you should have in your school repair arsenal.

• A few screwdrivers appropriate for woodwind instruments to tighten loose pivot screws and hinge rods. However, be careful that you know which screws should be turned and which should not be.

• A spring hook to hook needle springs back into their cradle.

• Blue painter’s tape to wrap up torn woodwind tenon corks.

• Plastic twist ties or twisted pipe cleaners to connect brace feet on a saxophone when the guard screw has fallen out. This way the threads are not damaged by an incorrect screw.

• Cable ties can temporarily connect a brace on a brass instrument and avoid a more expensive repair caused by soldering or gluing the connections.

• Non-latex bandages to keep a water key closed when the spring has broken. Latex can damage the lacquer or silver finish.

• Rotor string or braided fishing line to restring a rotor.

Stock Extra Supplies

Keep a small variety of cleaning and lubrication supplies in your office for students to use or purchase. Items like valve oils, slide grease, swabs and reeds can save the day.

Consider the Weather

It’s essential to know your year-round local weather, both inside and outside, so you can consider the best storage solutions to prevent repair problems in the short and long term.

Seasonal changes in temperature and humidity are much more dangerous for wood instruments, so humidifying and maintaining temperature in the music room is very beneficial.

Know Your Limits

Once you have the tools that you feel com­fortable using and have your room set up, all you need is experience.

Know your limits because there is a very fine line between making a student’s instrument play well for the concert and adding to the final repair cost or actually damaging a part. If you are unsure, leave the repair to the professionals.

This article originally appeared in the 2018 V3 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Streamline Rehearsals by Establishing a Routine

How many times has the thought, “If I only had one more week,” passed through your mind when preparing your ensemble for an upcoming performance?

You can actually get back some of that time by establishing a routine and structure that streamlines rehearsals and increases efficiency. To ensure consistency, consider establishing the following sequence.

Entrance and Preparation

Students enter quickly and quietly. Music may be playing in the background. Students retrieve their instruments and folders and take their seats.

Students put their music in rehearsal order as indicated by the detailed lesson plan, which should be clearly visible on the board in the same place each day. The plan should not only indicate the order of the selections to be rehearsed but also which sections and what specifically will be practiced, e.g., articulation or dynamic contrast. This lesson plan sets up the short-term goals to be realized during this rehearsal.

When Does Class Really Begin?

Students must know exactly when class begins. Is it when the bell rings? Is it when the director takes the podium? Getting class started is one of the major difficulties for beginning directors.

One middle school director in Henderson, Nevada, starts his beginning band class by playing a recording of a march (which changes weekly) as soon as the bell rings. This provides a given amount of time for students to be in their seats and ready to play. Students are not considered tardy as long as they are in their seats with instruments and folders by the end of the march.

This works well because the march encourages a prescriptive expectation as well as a weekly listening lesson. Whatever the policy, class must begin in the same fashion each day or a good bit of rehearsal time will be lost in just getting started.

Warmups

Warmups, scales, sight-reading and assorted exercises should be chosen purposefully to enhance tone quality and promote good technique. Try to provide warmups that are related to the literature being worked on that day.

Rehearsal Goals

Try to make strides in at least three pieces of music in each rehearsal. The higher the expectation, the better. Expectations should be set not necessarily in terms of level of difficulty but based on the level of achievement of the various musical aspects being rehearsed.

End of Rehearsal

At the end of the rehearsal, do three things.

1. Review the musical accomplishments by asking students a question like, “What improvements did we make in the Holst today?” Rehearsal review forms are one way for students to record their daily achievements. Authentic assessment activities like these forms also provide an opportunity for students to reflect upon their musical experiences. Always expect good writing, spelling, punctuation, etc.

2. Articulate what needs be worked on tomorrow as a result of what was achieved today.

3. Make relevant announcements during the last couple minutes of class, never at the beginning.

The benefit of following a routine is that more time will be allotted to music-making. It might even add up to that extra week that you wished for!

This article originally appeared in the 2018 V3 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Build Teamwork with Drum Circles

On the first day of school, students may come to band class and sit timidly, not making eye contact. If the teacher facilitates a drum circle, then by the end of class, everyone will be smiling and bubbling with excitement. “A drum circle is a great way to connect people together in a way that’s musical but not necessarily academic,” says Matt Savage, percussion specialist at Cary (North Carolina) High School, founder and director of Rhythm Alive drum circle events and a Yamaha Artist. “[They’re ideal] at the beginning of a new school year as a team-building event; before a concert to sharpen listening skills, rhythmic accuracy and ensemble playing; and after a concert or big event as a fun stress reliever and way to celebrate together.”

If you’d like to incorporate drum circles into your repertoire, here’s how to get started.

Create a Circle

Don’t leave the classroom chairs in their usual positions. Students should sit in a circle, so everyone can see each other, and each person is viewed as an equal participant.

You can set up chairs before students arrive or ask for help. One circle is fine for 50 students. Larger groups should sit in concentric circles.

Include Everyone

Drum circles are great for the entire band, not just percussionists. You can include color guard members and wind and string players.

“With the whole band, it puts the [students] in a different, unique, risky situation,” Savage says. “They have to play and feel rhythm in a different modality.”

Distribute Instruments

Try world percussion instruments like bongos, djembes, congas, shakers and tambourines. You can use empty soda bottles, wood blocks or five-gallon buckets. Or ask students to clap, snap or use body percussion.

If you’re handing out sticks or mallets, give each student one, not two. Using one mallet levels the playing field because “a lot of the wind [and string] players don’t have drum techniques,” Savage says.

Start with the Heart

group of music students in a large drum circle

Begin with a steady beat that is relatable to everyone. “I always start every one of my drum circles with the first rhythm you ever hear — the heartbeat, your mother’s heart,” Savage says. “The facilitator plays a steady ‘lub-dub’ rhythm on the drum. The counts in 4/4 time would be on 1 and 3. Ask the others to join in after 10 to 15 seconds of listening and feeling the heartbeat groove.”

Once everyone is playing, visually cue half of the circle to stop while the other half continues. Then, cue the half that isn’t playing to play the heartbeat between beats. One side will play on 1 and 3, and the other side will play on 2 and 4. Once the new rhythm is established, give cues to start and stop as you see fit.

Try Different Rhythms

Echoes are popular and effective: Play a simple rhythm and ask everyone to play it back. Then, tell a student to play a rhythm and have everyone echo it back. Move to the next student until everyone in the circle has a turn.

Or ask each person to play two notes in turn, striving for a steady 1-2, 1-2, 1-2 rhythm. Explain how to recover if the rhythm becomes unsteady.

Once the rhythm travels the circle a few times, increase the tempo slightly each time the beat reaches the starting point.

“The outcome should be an incredibly fast wave of notes around the circle,” Savage says.

Encourage Student Leaders

Drum circles can help participants develop rhythm, listening skills and coordination. They also give students the opportunity to lead a large group, sometimes for the first time.

“A few students really open up and bloom right in front of your eyes,” Savage says. “Sometimes the quiet [students] come out of their shells.”

Savage once asked a shy student to lead a drum circle and was pleased with the results.

“Instead of doing it the typical way — instead of pointing — he would use his legs, his head, his eye contact,” Savage says. “At one point, he started dancing. It erupted into this great strong group, and soon everyone was in the center and dancing. High school kids are self-conscious, but they were comfortable enough to come together and dance. It’s literally feeling the power of the drum.”

Measure Your Success

Students should think about music differently after a drum circle.

“The students have listened to each other and played rhythm in a different way,” Savage says. “Their rhythmic accuracy, their listening skills [and] their timing should improve. There should be a higher sense of camaraderie. There should be a buzz in the room.”

This article originally appeared in the 2018 V3 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Instruments at an Inner-City Music Program

In the blog post, Case Study: A Music Program Succeeds in the Inner City, read how the band program at Rancho High School in Las Vegas was transformed by band director Clint Williams. Even with all its successes, Rancho’s band program operates on a tight budget — owning no semi-trucks, using inexpensive stock uniforms and reusing equipment from season to season as much as possible. However, one area where the band does not skimp is in its instrument inventory.

Williams guarantees that each student in his program receives a school-issued classroom instrument. Those who play brass or woodwinds have one instrument in the classroom and one they can leave at home.

The school owns all of the student instruments and, most importantly, they’re all the same brand. “When you’re talking about at-risk students or low socioeconomic students, they don’t want to feel inferior,” Williams says. “I think it’s important to put everyone on the same playing field.”

How did he afford to provide the band with two instruments for each student? In his first two years at Rancho, Williams was “given a shot in the arm of money to acquire instruments” from the school’s principal, he says.

On top of that, for the first three years, his band did not travel. “All the fundraising we did went into purchasing quality instruments to put in the kids’ hands,” Williams says. “Not a piece of junk but something that was going to last. That’s why I ended up with a lot of Yamaha [instruments] because they’ll last.”

This article originally appeared in the 2018 V3 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Case Study: A Music Program Succeeds in the Inner City

Nestled between the city’s homeless corridor and a cemetery near the historic Fremont District of Las Vegas, Rancho High School might not seem like the ideal home for a successful performing arts program.

Clint WIlliams

But thanks to Clint Williams, Rancho’s director of bands, the program is thriving.

In the last five years, Williams put his personal mantra of “L’audace, l’audace, toujours l’audace!” (Audacity, audacity, always audacity!) to work. He transformed Rancho’s sputtering band program into one of the most successful in the state. Overall, the school has amassed 25 superior ratings at various concert festivals and five Sweepstakes Awards through the Southern Nevada Band Association.

The largest public high school in Nevada, Rancho has one of the highest homeless student populations in the county, and 73 percent of Rancho students qualify for free or reduced lunch.

On the flip side, the school offers five year-round bands: wind ensemble, wind symphony, concert band, freshman band and beginning band. The Rancho Regiment marching band is one of only two in the state that was a finalist at a Bands of America regional marching competition in 2017.

The Vision

In some ways Williams’ success can be attributed to the vision of the school’s principal, Dr. James Kuzma, who came to Rancho in 2008. At that time, Rancho was graduating around 50 percent of its students. Kuzma predicted that a quality performing arts program would lead students toward improved academic standings. Out of this priority, Kuzma brought in Williams in 2013 to lead the band program.

The program Williams inherited was bereft of hope and numbers. Just 87 of Rancho’s 3,300 students participated in the band program with only 49 in marching band. Rancho’s beleaguered program had not earned a superior rating in a generation.

On day one, the new band director laid down the law and abolished traditions that were inconsistent or that did not advance camaraderie or musical achievement. Williams warns directors that “getting rid of traditions can work, but it can also be risky.”

The key is to replace them with new traditions. “In our case that became the love of performance and good fundamental music skills,” Williams says.

Williams also encouraged students to gather for pregame dinners and honored graduating seniors with cords and trophies. In addition, he created a new logo for the band to signify a new beginning.

Directors should always start with the committed kids, Williams advises. His strategy freed the band of students whose interest in music was half-hearted or nonexistent. “I knew the students who remained did so because they loved making music, loved band and were committed to excellence,” Williams says.

Dexter Hidalgo, a clarinet player who spent four years in Williams’ program, knew immediately that the new director meant business. Before introducing himself, Williams was ousting disruptive students. “That set the foundation that this was much more serious than we’d thought,” Hidalgo says. “A lot of kids left that semester.”

Bold and Aggressive

Percussionists for the Rancho High School band practicing

The plan worked. In Williams’ first year, the Rancho Regiment placed first in its class at the Showdown at Silverado competition through the Marching Band Open Series circuit. Although Rancho had only 10 brass players, one of the top judges that day called his brass players “fearless,” Williams says.

“The best advice I can give is to be bold and aggressive — aggressive air, aggressive sound, aggressive performance … own it,” he says

Word of the band’s success spread. Soon students were arranging their class schedules to include concert band. “Human beings are attracted to achievement and excellence,” Williams says.

Students who participate in band must be disciplined, team players and accountable to one another, says Andrew Smouse, Rancho’s coordinator of percussion. “All of these are evident without question at Rancho,” Smouse says. “A huge portion of that is what Clint Williams brought to the table.”

Quality and Quantity

To increase his numbers, Williams raised his standards rather than lowering them. Focusing on the individual player rather than the ensemble was the means to this end. “I never want a child to feel neglected; I don’t want a [student] to feel inferior in any way,” Williams says. Assessing the individual is “where it all starts.”

Hidalgo says, “There was no moment when [Mr. Williams] was too busy for [any] of us.”

Demanding quality is vital to increase numbers. “The best advice I can give for growth is to always provide excellence in the performances of the high school ensemble,” Williams says. “This, partnered with communication to the middle school directors, will attract students to your program. People are attracted to high standards. … Quality breeds quantity.”

With higher standards and increased quality, Williams’ numbers spiked. By 2018, more than one-third of Rancho’s students were enrolled in the performing arts while the school’s graduation rate nearly doubled to 97 percent.

Band directors, Williams says, must always consider optics. Marching bands are often the public face of a high school. Therefore, they must exude quality when they play — from the national anthem to the school’s fight song.

All In

Parents buy into band programs if their children are playing to the highest standard. Before Williams arrived at Rancho, few parents were involved. Deanna McHenry, a parent of two Rancho band students, witnessed the immediate positive effects Williams had on the program.

“He raised the bar and expected them to be excellent,” McHenry says. “Mr. Williams started to include the parents more. The band boosters was started. More parents were buying into supporting the band and supporting their kids. He opened the doors, so parents got more involved.”

Parents started building props and equipment and doing the band’s laundry.

Getting students and their parents involved and committed to the band program is just one of Williams’ many achievements. “Clint Williams is one of the most dedicated professional band educators I’ve had the privilege of knowing or working with,” Smouse says.

This article originally appeared in the 2018 V3 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Pablo Rieppi and the Art of Practicing

In the blog post, Pablo Rieppi’s Passion for Percussion, we learned of Rieppi’s nearly nonstop practicing regimen through his college days. To keep daily practice from becoming tedious, Rieppi recommends the following:

Emphasize Creativity

For Rieppi, the joy of practicing comes with finding the creativity in your part. To bring out that creativity, Rieppi has written solo snare drum accompaniments for students to use during practice. Although snare drums have no pitch, “you still have to pretend you’re playing with someone who’s playing melodies and harmonies, so that comes out in your phrasing or tone color, articulation or dynamics,” he says. “I wrote these accompaniments for solo snare drum [to help] students practice creatively with pieces that can get mundane.”

Here are books Rieppi has written to help snare drummers:

Keep a Practice Journal

When students become frustrated with practicing, a good educator helps them break down the aspects of practicing that are giving them trouble. Rieppi tells his students to reflect on the process of practicing by writing down their thoughts, feelings and ideas in a practice journal. “If they’re having trouble with a piece, I want them to think about the areas causing them difficulty,” he says. “How does it feel in your fingertips? Your gut? Your back? Is it uncomfortable? Why? Find ways to make it comfortable. You have to help them unravel the way they think.”

This article originally appeared in the 2018 V3 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Pablo Rieppi’s Passion for Percussion

World-renowned percussionist Pablo Rieppi decided to teach himself to play drums as a junior in high school.

Little did he know that a year later, he would decide to pursue music professionally when the rock band he formed with his friends won a local battle-of-the-bands competition. Starting on a chosen instrument at a later age than typical musicians, Rieppi faced many hurdles in the pursuit of his passion. But he eventually succeeded due to his resilience and dedication.

“The greatest strength is … grit,” Rieppi says.

Throughout his career, Rieppi’s grit helped him push past obstacles that arose instead of stalling in his tracks. The first challenge came during his college audition for George Mason University in Fairfax, Virginia, when a panel of college professors asked Rieppi to play the marimba. “I asked, ‘Which one’s the marimba?’ They looked at me like, ‘Who … is this guy?'” Rieppi recalls. “I said, ‘I can just jam on the snare drum.’ So I did that.”

Yamaha Master Educator Anthony Maiello was one of the professors on the panel. He told Rieppi to take some lessons, then come back and audition again. Rather than taking this feedback as a rejection, Rieppi accepted the constructive criticism.

“I said, ‘Sure! I’ll take lessons!'” Rieppi says. “Being naïve was my anesthesia. It prevented me from feeling a lot of bumps and bruises because I figured everything would be fine.”

He took private lessons with Ken Harbison of the National Symphony Orchestra and was later accepted at George Mason.

Now the percussion department coordinator and faculty member with the Pre-College Division at The Juilliard School in New York, a member of the New York City Ballet Orchestra and a regular guest with the New York Philharmonic, Rieppi emphasizes the values of ambition and commitment.

Feeding the Mind and Body

Pablo Rieppi

With a bottomless hunger for musical knowledge, Rieppi began devouring the wisdom of his professors during his undergraduate years and while working on his master’s at Juilliard.

Maiello grew to be one of his greatest mentors. “He is responsible for forming my standards when I was a student,” Rieppi says. “He’s the kind of person who teaches and leads by example. If he says that you should work hard every day to develop your ears, it’s because he places a score on the treadmill and sight sings while he works out every morning.”

When Rieppi holds his own students to a high standard of excellence, he thinks of Maiello’s influence. “I realize I am transmitting many of the standards I learned from Mr. Maiello,” he says.

Rieppi also recalls the tutelage he received under Elden “Buster” Bailey, the retired percussionist of the New York Philharmonic, who passed away in 2004. Because it was Bailey’s final year of teaching at Juilliard, Rieppi was committed to squeezing as much knowledge out of him as he could.

Rieppi’s lesson with Bailey followed his lunch, so Rieppi would start warming up during the lunch hour; that way, he was able to get more advice from Bailey outside of the scheduled lesson. “I really had a two-hour lesson instead of one,” Rieppi says. “It was just an amazing year.”

Around the same time in his life, Rieppi attended a class about the Alexander Technique, which taught him to develop strong posture and body techniques that he incorporated into his percussion playing. “Both Buster and the Alexander Technique showed me how to use my body, my back, my fingers, everything — how to play better using rebound,” he says.

As an educator, Rieppi tells his students to use posture and movement in their percussion performance. “A lot of times, I’ll look at their fingers or their hands or the way they’re holding their sticks, and they’re like, ‘Why is this a big deal?'” he says. “I’ll go into an explanation [of] my days with Buster and how the body and physics help us be better musicians.”

Teaching the Individual

When teaching, Rieppi makes sure students have a complete understanding of why they should do something, not just what they should do.

“I give them a long-winded explanation, and they understand,” he says. “It’s not just something they’re going to forget after a lesson. They’re going to think about using [their] back, using different muscles, how gravity helps the stick come down easily by itself, how you can recycle your strokes to play more efficiently.”

Rieppi’s thorough explanations help him gain trust with his students. “I tell [them], ‘If I ask you to do something, you don’t have to do it unless I have a really good reason.'”

Not only do Rieppi’s clear explanations help students retain and internalize new skills, but they also help him tailor his teaching, taking into account each student’s back­ground and experiences. “My job as a teacher is to understand where the student is coming from, [to] find an individual way to address what they need, so it doesn’t become a formula,” he says. “If you took two actors and gave them the same script, it’s going to sound totally different. Music is the same.”

Rieppi recommends taking students’ differences into account rather than ignoring them. “You can take what they’ve learned [in the past] and adjust it, so that going forward, you can have a much broader base,” Rieppi says. “I’ve written books. I have all these worksheets. But at the end of the day, each worksheet has to be individualistic.”

Figuring Out Priorities

Pablo Rieppi with percussion instruments

Regardless of a student’s level of expertise, practice always needs to be the number one priority. Early in his college education, Rieppi developed an incredibly strong work ethic and a passion for the art of practicing itself. “I just practiced, ate and went to the bathroom,” he says. “Every free hour, I practiced.”

While at George Mason, Rieppi would become frustrated when the music building closed its doors around 10 p.m. “I wanted to practice even later,” he says.

He asked the director of the music department to keep the building open later; his request was denied. He then asked multiple teachers if they could find a solution for him. Rieppi was ultimately given 24-hour access to the building.

While Rieppi exemplifies the importance of making school and practicing a priority, he warns students that school shouldn’t be their top priority forever. “School is just the beginning,” he says. “A lot of students see [their] master’s degree as the final step into the professional world. It’s really the first steppingstone.”

Throughout the journey, Rieppi also made family a priority. “My parents bought my first Yamaha marimba and were very supportive of my dream to be a musician,” Rieppi says. “My wife and kids are the most important things in my life. I love them, and I need them. I’m blessed to have both [music and family].”

His son, a rising percussionist, has allowed him to bring the worlds of music and family together. “I play with him, but I’m not his actual teacher,” Rieppi says. “I’m his dad first. I got him his own percussion teacher. I’m not going to sit down with my son every week and say, ‘You [need to] practice more!’ We jam together. We just have fun with music.”

For Rieppi, having fun with music was what inspired him to pursue percussion in the first place. “To me, music is like a vital organ; it has taught me almost everything, and I have to have it,” he says.

That passion for music is essential to the often-tumultuous journey to securing a paying job in music. “There are some guys who take 36 auditions before they get the job,” he says. “It’s a huge investment from your soul, your time and your wallet. To keep up that investment, [so] that someday it might pay off, that’s grit. … It takes a while …[but] being able to make a living and being happy with what you’re doing [is] my definition of success.”

This article originally appeared in the 2018 V3 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Snare Drum Warm-Up, Part 4

The fourth in a five-part series about creating the ideal warm-up routine.

The previous three blog articles in this series got your hands moving and introduced accent patterns and wrist lifts. Now we’ll add a new rudiment: the flam.

Element #4: Flams

The flam is one of the original 13 National Association of Rudimental Drummers (N.A.R.D.) snare drum rudiments. It consists of a stroke preceded by a grace note. At this point in the warm-up routine, I like to take a step back and give my hands a chance to relax. The first version goes back to the “8 on a hand” preceded by a flam.  This also introduces the down stroke on the last eighth note of each measure:

Musical annotation.

The next exercise incorporates four flam rudiments that are very common in the Charley Wilcoxin Rudimental books. It also helps you practice Flamacues beginning on the left hand — something I personally didn’t do as much as I should have as a young percussionist:

Musical annotation.

Be careful of the stickings at the end of this exercise, where a double is used to ensure that you begin on the opposite hand when you repeat the exercise.

Remember to start at a slow tempo and use a big range of motion to get your muscles loose. Use a metronome and track your progress. As before, try increasing the speed of the metronome by two beats per measure every time you repeat the exercise. (This can be done manually, or with the use of an app.)

Creating a warm-up routine is an individual process and what works for me will not necessarily work for everyone. Feel free to create your own routine! 

 

Check out the previous postings in our Snare Drum Warm-Up series:

Part 1: Warming up the big muscles

Part 2: Transitioning to the small muscles

Part 3: Accent patterns and wrist lifts

Part 5: Wrap it up with rolls

Five Reasons Why Home Theater Is Better Than Going to the Movies

There you sit, happily at home. Your favorite flick is on your 4K screen and cinematic sound from your home theater setup is filling every corner of the room. A decade ago, this might not have been possible. For others, it might be the next possibility.

Since the dawn of time (or early 1900s, take your pick), moving pictures and the cinema were the perfect duo. Like Bonnie and Clyde, Batman and Robin, Garth and Wayne. They were synonymous with dinner and a show. The perfect date night: easy to plan, predict and budget for. But a lot has changed since a Charlie Chaplin premiere. Especially technology.

Not only have digital streaming services, movies on demand and popular cable shows come to rival Hollywood’s biggest blockbusters, the ability to enjoy your favorite movies at home has also become increasingly affordable and gratifying. In fact, the experience at home might be even better than a night out at the movies.

Here are five reasons why:

1. Cost. This one’s a no-brainer. According to the National Association of Theater Owners, the average cost of a ticket at movie theaters in the U.S. rose to $9.38 in the second quarter of 2018. Then there’s the popcorn conundrum to consider. A large bucket (even without butter) and two drinks can easily run $20 or more, making that night out at the movies lighten your wallet by nearly fifty bucks! Compare that to staying at home, preparing special snacks, enjoying your favorite drinks and using zero gas to drive to the theater — and you’ve saved yourself a bundle of cash to use on other things. Perhaps an enhancement to your sound system, or purchasing the movie itself?

2. More Choice. Sure, binge-watching more than one movie at a theater is possible (though costly), but you’re limited to only those films being shown at the venue and the need to coordinate show times carefully. But if you stay at home, you have nearly endless content at your disposal — content that you can watch at your convenience, with the pause button assuring plenty of time for restroom breaks and the like. There’s Blu-ray, DVDs and purchased streaming content, as well as cable packages that offer a wide array of television shows you can’t find in any theater. When it comes to the sheer amount of choice available to every home, there’s really no comparison.

3. Cleanliness. Hands up: Who likes sticky floors and dirty seats? Sure, many establishments have upgraded to recliners, but that’s just another way to sweep things into the cracks. Far better to stay at home where you have total control over hygiene.

4. Convenience/Comfort/Control. Ah yes, the three Cs. Let’s weigh the facts. At home, you can get out of bed, walk into the living room and you’re ready to watch a movie. Or you could shower, dress and drive to the theater. I don’t know about you, but lounging in PJs or a robe strikes me as a much more appealing option. You can also control the movies and TV shows you watch at home, as opposed to the theater, where you’re at the mercy of show times and traffic. Nothing quite compares to the convenience of watching what you want when you want.

5. Noise/Sound Quality. Save yourself a headache and high blood pressure by controlling not just what you watch but also the environment you watch it in. Staying at home allows you to avoid rude theater-goers who never learned about public etiquette. (It seems as if, no matter how many creative ways theaters try to explain the shortcomings of humankind when it comes to cell phones and talking during movies, humankind simply will not abide.) What’s more, you can get better sound at home, especially if you calibrate your system so it performs optimally. Compare that to a theater that may or may not have quality speakers or the capability to run the kind of setup the film demands, with presence and enough bass to rumble your seat. A standard 5.1-channel surround sound system in your home can easily rival (or even surpass) that of many theaters.

You may want to remember these points before you decide to go see the latest blockbuster in the movie theater. Chances are it’ll be available to watch at home in a couple of months anyway!

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha AV products.

Why Does the Oboe Lead the Orchestra in Tuning?

Man playing oboe in an orchestra.

Every orchestral performance starts the same way: First, you hear the oboe play an A (the standard tuning note, usually 440 Hz, though some orchestras prefer a higher 442 Hz), followed by each instrument playing an A and the entire orchestra tuning with one another. This is the moment that announces the start of the concert.

It also raises the question of why the oboe is in charge.

Beyond the fact that its bright, penetrating sound is easy to hear, there are two explanations: The first is that it is because the oboe has a relatively stable pitch, and the second is that it is because the pitch of the oboe is unstable. The two explanations are the complete opposites of one another.

So what’s going on here?

Nearly all instruments can be unstable in pitch due to changes in heat, humidity and the like. Typically, however, they come with mechanisms (such as tuning pegs on a string instrument) that allow performers to tune them. However, because of its physical structure, you can only change the pitch of an oboe by removing and inserting reeds of different breadth or length — unlike the way you can alter the tension of a violin’s strings, for example, or adjust the position of a clarinet’s barrel. What’s more, it is nearly impossible to make any sudden changes to an oboe on the day of a performance.

The bottom line is that it’s difficult to adjust the pitch of an oboe. Therefore, the other instruments must match it, not the other way around. And that’s why the oboe serves as the orchestra’s standard for tuning!

 

For more information about Yamaha oboes, click here.

This posting is excerpted from the Yamaha Musical Instrument Guide.

 

This Is How Music Moves Us

Many of us talk about the way our favorite music “moves” us, but most musicians I know don’t like dancing, and are not particularly good at it, either. Yet all musicians use their bodies to make music. Whether it’s blowing in a tube (trumpets, clarinets), bowing a string (violin, cello), using a mallet or stick (timpani, xylophone, drums) or pressing keys (piano, organ), there is no musical sound without some body movement initiating it, and most commonly, many successive body movements. Even singing, which requires that we force a column of air through our larynx and modulate our vocal folds in very precise ways, requires movement — it’s just that most of those movements are invisible to observers.

Clearly, professional dancers must have a strong musical sense in order to do what they do, just as musicians must have a strong sense of rhythm in their bodies. I’ve become interested lately in why and how non-professionals move to music — regular people dancing at parties, at concerts, raves or in their own living rooms with the shades drawn.

Kids dance fitness class.

To put this in context, infants begin to move their bodies rhythmically in response to music in their first two years of life, even before they have full control over their motor systems. These early movements are not usually synchronized with the music — that skill typically emerges at around age three or four, though many children are not especially good at it until they are older. Some animals can also keep a beat, although generally not much better than two-year-olds. Quasi-synchronization has been claimed for California Sea Lions, Rhesus Macaque Monkeys, and Eleonora Cockatoos.

What is it in the brain that causes us to move to music? As infants, we all go through a period of exploring the world we’re in and trying to manipulate it — this is part of an exploratory instinct (or “program,” if you prefer) in the brain. We learn about the world by actively exploring it, by interacting with it. When a baby reaches for a spinning mobile above its bed, it is acting this out. What it learns is how to move its arms toward a specific object, and, later, how to predict where a moving object will be and reach out to grab it. Reaching and grasping are two of the basic ways that babies learn how to make movements that have desired consequences. When we’re older, we learn to catch a ball thrown at us, to hit a baseball, get on and off a moving escalator, and so on. Neuroscientifically speaking, babies and young children are coordinating the input-output link between their visual systems and their motor systems. That is, they see something with their eyes, and due to complex circuitry in the brain, they can learn to create an appropriate motor response. This visual-motor coupling is fundamental.

Similarly, we have auditory-motor coupling circuits that allow us to take in information from our ears and respond appropriately with our hands, feet and other body parts. Toddlers love their little noise-making games because it reinforces this training: they push on a button, lever or key and a sound comes out. Magical! (The same word I’d use to describe watching Chick Corea play the piano.) One of the things that effectuates such coupling is that entire populations of neurons — millions at a time — synchronize their firings to the beat of the music. This makes it easy for us to move our bodies in time to the music. And, in a recent experiment I published with my colleagues Dan Abrams and Vinod Menon, we found that when people listen to music together, their brain waves synchronize too. This has huge implications for diplomacy and the prospects for peace, as well as for reducing interpersonal and intergroup tensions.

So why is it that so many professional musicians don’t dance? We don’t have any research on this, but I suspect it’s because, compared to dancing, playing a musical instrument and singing require both different muscles and a very different use of those muscles. For a musician, a tenth of a gram of pressure from the fingers or a 1/1000th of a second difference in timing can make all the difference between a great-sounding note and a bad-sounding one, and the musician needs to make hundreds of these kinds of microdecisions a minute. Casual dancers also need to exert muscle control, but the movements are very different, and typically require less precision. It’s also a different approach and mindset: You can dance and have a good time (more so if you’re uninhibited) at any skill level. But playing a musical instrument in a satisfying way requires a minimum level of skill. Musicians may not enjoy dancing because they are accustomed to their rhythmic movements to be very highly refined (and to come as a result of arduous training), and they can’t let go of that mindset long enough to cut loose and cut some rug.

Speaking of the precise movements required to play a musical instrument, an interesting thing happens when musicians practice: They expand the regions of their brain used for performing on their instruments. Violin players, for example, have an increased area of the part of their brain that controls their left hand, the hand that is required to make the most precise movements. Musicians in general tend to have a larger than normal corpus callosum, the bundle of fibers that connect the two cerebral hemispheres — the left brain and the right brain. As musicians get better, their movements become routine, which is just another way of saying that new pathways get wired up in the brain that allow them to play with their memory, and with their subconscious, without having to consciously direct their fingers (or vocal cords). This allows musicians to concentrate on the emotional aspects of their performance, and on communicating those emotions to their audience.

And, perhaps, to dance a little on stage too.

Live Sound Interconnections 101

Audio signals always start somewhere and end somewhere else (usually at a speaker). In the course of their journey, they typically travel through a variety of different connectors and cabling. Using the right cable and connector for the job is as important as using the right size socket wrench to tighten a nut. Here’s everything you need to know about the kinds of interconnections you’ll encounter in both live sound and recording.

Three Different Signal Level Types

There are three types (though technically, these are actually ranges) of signal level: mic, line and instrument. Let’s look at each in turn.

Mic Level

Microphones produce very low signals that must be amplified before they can be sent through a mixer and then on to a power amplifier and speakers. That’s why every mic input on a mixer has a preamp that raises the weak output from a microphone up to a much stronger line level. Mic cables typically have an XLR male connector at one end and an XLR female connector at the other end:

Side by side pictures of an XLR male connector and an XLR female connector.
Line Level

Line level signals are much stronger (“hotter”) than mic signals and therefore don’t require as much amplification or gain as mic level signals. They can come from a variety of sources, including the outputs of a mixer or an outboard effects device such as digital delay or reverb. There are other devices that produce line level signal too, such as computer audio interfaces, CD/DVD players, samplers and some keyboard workstations. The output of wireless microphone receivers can often be switched to either line or mic level, so make sure you know what the setting is before you connect it to your mixer. Any line level output can be plugged directly into a power amplifier or powered speaker and will produce plenty of volume.

Cabling carrying line level signals can terminate in any combination of XLR, TS (Tip-Sleeve), TRS (Tip-Ring-Sleeve) or even RCA connectors:

Side by side images of a TS male connector and and TRS male connector.
RCA male connector.
TS/TRS female (left) and RCA female (right) connectors.
Instrument Level

What about the signal from an electric bass or guitar? These kind of fall into the Island of Misfit Toys. Instrument signals are too strong for a mic input and too weak for a line input. Instrument connections almost always use the TS connectors shown above. Yamaha STAGEPAS 400BT and 600BT mixers have special “combo” jack inputs that can accept XLR, TRS or TS connectors (but only one at a time!). There’s also a switch for Mic, Line or “Hi-Z”; the latter turns the combo jack into an instrument input with just the right amount of gain to bring the signal from an electric bass or guitar up to line level without adding noise or distortion:

STAGEPAS combo jack with Instrument input.

This “Hi-Z” (impedance) switch also ensures that the input has the correct electrical characteristics so that the pickups on your electric guitar or bass sound the way they are supposed to.

Other Types of Audio Signal

On occasion you may find some unconventional audio connections on a mixer. For example, the Yamaha MG16XU has a USB input that you can use to connect a phone or laptop for music recording and playback. The Yamaha STAGEPAS 400 BT and 600BT powered mixers feature Bluetooth capability, allowing you to stream audio from your phone wirelessly for music in-between sets.

Here’s What Not to Do

Live sound newbies sometimes make the mistake of thinking that, as long as you have the correct connectors on a cable, you can plug anything into anything. Not true. For example, you could in theory make a special cable that would allow you to physically connect an electric guitar to a mic input, but the signal from the instrument would almost certainly overload the mic input, causing distortion. A similar thing happens if you try plugging a CD player’s line level output into a microphone input.

Conversely, if you connect a microphone to a line input you’ll find that the signal from the mic is not loud enough to use — even when you turn the gain control up all the way. There will also be lots of background noise and/or hiss in the signal. That’s another reason to make sure you always match output levels to input levels.

Unbalanced vs. Balanced

Unbalanced

Any audio connection requires at least two wires or conductors: a positive (“+”) signal (sometimes called ‘hot’), and a ground. Inside the cable, the ground is typically wrapped or braided around the + wire:

Unbalanced cable.

The ground wire is often called the “shield” because it not only carries audio but also helps to protect the + wire from interference produced by cell phones, lighting dimmers, and radio and TV stations (this is known as “RFI” or Radio Frequency Interference).

This basic two-conductor arrangement is called unbalanced, and is generally used by electric guitars and basses, as well as some electronic keyboards. In addition, connections from most DJ mixers and analog turntables are unbalanced, as are most speaker and headphone cables — even some inexpensive patch cables. (A “patch” cable is a short length of cabling used to connect the output of one device to the input of another via a series of jacks arranged closely together in a patch bay.) Unbalanced cables are OK (but not great) at rejecting RFI because the shield itself works as an antenna. For that reason, unbalanced cable runs should be no longer than about 15 or 20 feet.

Unbalanced cables used for electric guitars and basses terminate in TS connectors, while those used for DJ mixers and CD/DVD players usually terminate in RCA connectors. The 1/8-inch mini or 3.5 mm TRS connectors you’ll find on phones and MP3 players are also unbalanced.

1/8-inch (3.5 mm) mini TRS connector.

Unbalanced cables are generally not used for microphones because the noise picked up by the cable would be relatively loud, and so, when amplified along with the mic signal, would be very noticeable. The goal is to get rid of the noise while retaining the original signal. And that’s exactly the purpose of a balanced line.

Balanced

A balanced cable uses three conductors instead of two. One carries the original signal (the “+”). A second carries an inverted (phase reverse) duplicate of the original and is called the  “–“ (negative or cold). The third shields the + and – from interference. Sometimes there is also a piece of foil wrapped around the + and – to increase the amount of shielding. Balanced lines can easily be run upwards of 150 feet without significant loss of signal or added noise. However, because of the additional circuitry required, balanced gear tends to be more expensive than unbalanced equipment.

Balanced cable.

The most common connectors used by balanced cables are XLR and TRS. Note that one, and only one balanced signal can be carried by a single XLR or TRS cable. Don’t be fooled into thinking that a TRS connector is always used as a “stereo” connector. It’s better to view a TRS connector as a tool that can be used for many purposes, like a hammer. For example, it can be used for unbalanced stereo headphones, for a mono balanced connection or for a special connection called an “insert” (a send/return at unity gain). TRS connectors are rarely, if ever, used by professional microphones.

Note that using a TRS cable for an electric guitar or bass will not make the signal balanced, and may actually add more noise than if you use the proper TS cable. Conversely, using a TS connector for a balanced signal instead of a TRS one will work — sort of — but you may hear additional noise and/or lose some signal level, so it’s not a great idea.

This may all seem a lot of information to take in, but the bottom line is that using the right cables and connectors will keep your audio clean and quiet — the ultimate goal in both live sound and recording.

All photographs courtesy of the author.

 

Check out our other Tools of the Trade postings.

Click here for more information about Yamaha mixers.

Snare Drum Warm-Up, Part 3

The third in a five-part series about creating the ideal warm-up routine.

The two previous blog articles in this series got your hands moving. They started with eighth notes and progressed to sixteenth notes. The exercises in this posting will begin to introduce accent patterns and wrist lifts.

Element #3: Accents

Start with the theme and progress to the variations once you feel comfortable.

Theme:

Musical annotation.

Variation 1:

Musical annotation.

Variation 2:

Musical annotation.

Be careful of the stickings in Variations 1 and 2. These have been written with triplets and doubles to ensure that you begin on the opposite hand when you repeat the exercise.

Remember to start at a slow tempo and use a big range of motion to get your muscles loose. Use a metronome and track your progress. As before, try increasing the speed of the metronome by two beats per measure every time you repeat the exercise. (This can be done manually, or with the use of an app.)

Creating a warm-up routine is an individual process and what works for me will not necessarily work for everyone. Feel free to create your own routine! 

 

Check out the other postings in our Snare Drum Warm-Up series:

Part 1: Warming up the big muscles

Part 2: Transitioning to the small muscles

Part 4: Adding flams to the equation

Part 5: Wrap it up with rolls

The Sounds of Halloween

The ghosts and goblins will soon be coming out to play, delighting and frightening young and old alike. Whether you’re planning a big Halloween bash or just want to set the mood for the trick-or-treaters at your door, the right kind of music can always add some extra scream potential.

At the Yamaha Downloadables website, you’ll find all the ingredients for creating a scary soundtrack, including Halloween-themed MIDI songs, PianoSoft software and sheet music — everything you need to turn your keyboard into a haunted piano. And if you’re a Yamaha Disklavier user, there’s definitely no better time of year to enjoy the chilling “ghost player” effect of your instrument’s moving keys!

Here are some of the hobgoblin-y highlights:

  • Two PianoSoft albums that can turn even the most unassuming domicile into a foreboding haunted house: Boo – Halloween Favorites and A Haunted Halloween.
  • A great selection of Halloween sheet music. If you’re going to learn how to play the Tocatta and Fugue in D Minor by the 31st, you probably need to get started now!
  • With Disklavier Radio, you can stream Halloween music directly to your Disklavier — no need to change CDs or fiddle with your music player. And, as a bonus, the instrument will appear to be playing itself!
  • CVP and CSP Clavinova owners can enjoy an extra dose of ghoulish fun by downloading Kooky Karoake MIDI files such as Monster Mash, which, as demonstrated in the video below, automatically adds Boris Karloff-like effects to your accompanying vocals.

So stock up on the treats (a must if you want to avoid tricks), set out that jack-o-lantern and have yourself a super-spooky time!

 

For more information, visit the Yamaha Downloadables website.

Four Benefits of Having a Professional Do Your Home Theater Installation

We’ve all been there. You think the do-it-yourself (DIY) route will not only save you money but also help you avoid the hassle of finding the right person — and someone who might be coming into your home at a time that’s inconvenient for you. Some projects are less daunting than others, such as installing a sound bar with a couple of wireless speakers. But as the number of components in your home theater system continues to grow, so does the complexity and your ability (and spirit) to take on their installation.

Before you get past the point of no return, here are four reasons why you should consider hiring a pro to install your home theater:

1.  Much less research is required

You can easily find the right person for the job through a quick internet search or by asking a friend or two, and then you won’t need to spend hours on end watching online instructional videos or scouring the hardware store for some random tool you may never use again. Hiring a professional installer will save you tons of time by letting you rely on the expertise of someone who does this type of work daily.

2.  You can get the job done well regardless of the level of expertise required

You might consider yourself a jack of all trades but there’s always somebody who can do it better. A pro will also usually know ways to do things that can save you money as well as time, like whether or not to drill holes or use a different product. They can also troubleshoot a difficult situation that you might make worse with an uninformed decision. Plus, most professional installers offer service and support should additional questions arise or further work be required.

3.  Stress reduction

We all have more than enough stress in our lives without having to add more. It’s all too easy to work up a sweat and suffer through a migraine when running speaker cables through your walls that might accidentally put holes in your pipes. Instead, why not avoid the hassle and allow a pro to take on the full scope of the project? Sure, it may cost some money out of pocket, but it’ll save you from freaking out over how expensive it would be to replace whatever it is you might have damaged while attending the school of hard knocks. Plus, it’ll help free up your time to focus on other projects for which you’re better suited.

4.  There’s probably a lot that an installer knows that you don’t

If you consider yourself the next Bob Vila, then this part’s not for you — but let’s face it, most of us are not on that level. Few people are experts at both carpentry and installing electrical components in their homes. Professional installers not only have the knowledge to be more efficient, but they can provide you with options you might not be aware of. Not only might an installer help keep you from spending thousands on unneeded repairs and home updates, they may open up possibilities for integrating other components of your home into a system as smart as your theater, including lighting and security.

Taking on a home theater installation project by yourself, with the potential savings in money that goes along with it, is certainly doable, especially if you’re handy around the house. But some things — like expertise and peace of mind — are often well worth a little extra coin. Leave it to a professional instead and you’ll likely end up spending more time enjoying your home theater than fixing it.

 

To find a Yamaha dealer, use our dealer locator here. If you’re looking for a custom installer for a specific brand like Yamaha, we recommend you search locally (with a search engine or social community website) using the terms “home theater custom installers.” Availability of custom installers may vary based on region.

A Story of Healing

I talk a lot here about the power of music. But the power of hard work and perseverance is equally potent, and the two combined can make for an almost unstoppable force.

Take my friend Ray Levier. After being severely burned in an unfortunate childhood accident, he faced the loss of several of his fingers and some of his motor skills. But he was determined to not let that affect his future and what he loved doing most: drumming, creating and making music.

Young man with burn scars on face and wearing a ball cap sitting at a drumkit.

His is a story of not just surviving but thriving. Beyond Ray’s musical prowess, he rides motorcycles, jumps out of airplanes and climbs mountains. He has a relentless zen-like focus and determination to constantly get better at his craft.

“To me, the power of music means healing,” Ray explains. “Music goes beyond where words go. In my travels, when you go to other countries, people may not know politics, but they know music and how it makes them feel good. I think music is a powerful expression of a human being that truly touches people in a deep way. It is what makes me, and those around me, feel good.”

When the accident happened, Ray had just started getting into the drums. “At first I was like, oh no,” he says, “but I also thought, there is no way I’m going to just let this slip away. [After the operation], I looked down and I said “I have hands, that’s all I care about.” If I can hold the sticks, I can do this.”

Levier has always credited his mom, who is an accredited energy healer, with helping him through the challenging times. “When I was lying there in the hospital, she told me to think healing thoughts,” he says. “She said think about what makes me feel good and I knew right away that drums were it. Drumming was something that I just couldn’t get out of my thoughts.”

And drum he did. But he also had to approach the instrument from a new angle. “I thought I could learn everything that a human can that has normal facility of their hands,” he recalls. “In my mind, there was no handicap; I just had to use different muscles and strategies. Most of the common drum techniques did not apply to me, because it was about finger touch and just letting the stick kind of bounce within the fingers. So that didn’t gravitate to me when I was learning. What I did was use hard work and perseverance instead.”

It’s that no-holds-barred attitude of having to succeed that has pushed many people to new levels, including Ray. Very simply, the more people told him what he couldn’t do, the more focused he got. And once he was on that path, there was no looking back.

During this single-minded pursuit, Levier found that even twelve hours of practice a day wasn’t enough, because he started to see the larger scope of what was possible, deciding to use the great drummers of all time as motivation to succeed. “I looked at guys like Buddy Rich and felt I could aspire to his chops and ability,” he explains. “I thought of it as shooting for the stars and if I hit the mountain, that would be completely acceptable.”

None of this was easy. “It was about showing up and getting your hands dirty,” he says. “You have to push through that feeling inside of you that says this sucks here. So you punch through the touch practice sessions and you massage it and polish it and then you sometimes break through and discover, whoa, there is a diamond underneath all this crap. Then you start to see the benefits of what you’ve been pouring your blood, sweat and tears into. Overall, the more frustrated I get at something, the more laser focused I get to overcome it.”

Young man riding a camel in front of a pyramid.

These concentrated efforts and endless practice sessions paid off. Ray today travels the world playing drums for a variety of artists, including KJ Denhert, who he’s worked with for over 20 years. “I’ve been to Egypt [with KJ] and got to go up to King Kofah’s chamber in the top of the pyramids,” he says with wonder. “Words can’t describe that. The epiphany hit me that I was getting paid to be in this amazing place to play for people that don’t speak our language and most of them don’t even know the style we play. But it didn’t matter, because they know it moves them.”

A similar thing happened when the band traveled to Nepal and played the Kathmandu Jazz Festival. “We were having lunch on the top of this building and the waiter points and says, “That’s the tip of Mount Everest. You rarely get to see this.” It was an amazing experience.” Music has also allowed Ray to perform for audiences from Alaska to Italy, as well as St. Barths and St. John in the US Virgin Islands.

My friend Ray Levier has played on countless TV tracks, released several of his own records, and is currently working on another project that includes the likes of guitarist Mike Stern and bassist Will Lee. A deeply introspective soul, he has a unique outlook that likens life to a pinball game. “If you can keep that ball up and don’t let it fall down the gutter you’re going to hit things,” he explains. “You’re going to score and you’ll gain points in your life. It’s not always easy. It’s hard to keep things juggling and always moving. But whatever your big dreams and lofty goals are, you have to go for them, because we only have a limited amount of time here.”

“I feel super blessed to do what I do as a musician, to see the world, play music and bring joy and happiness to others,” Ray says. And we in turn are blessed to have people like Ray Levier show us the way.

Photos courtesy of the author and Mike Dwyer. Video courtesy of Scott E Moore and Eric Feldman.

 

Check out Rich’s other postings.

Jeff Coffin Video Series, Part 2: Caring for Vinyl

Being passionate about something means both being knowledgeable and nurturing that passion. Vinyl is no different. Aside from playing the records, it’s also important to maintain them.

In the first video in this series, Dave Matthews Band saxophonist Jeff Coffin took us to his favorite local record store and showed us how he shops for vinyl. In this installment, Jeff welcomes us into his home and talks about some of his favorite records, along with providing tips for the care and maintenance of vinyl.

Click here for more information about the Yamaha MusicCast VINYL 500 Wi-Fi turntable.

Snare Drum Warm-Up, Part 2

The second in a five-part series about creating the ideal warm-up routine.

Part 1 of this series explored ways of warming up the big muscles. In this article, I want to talk about transitioning to the small muscles.

Element #2: Moving from Big Muscles to Small Muscles

Musical annotation.

This exercise is a combination of singles, doubles and paradiddles:

Note that this is written in 3/4 time. Too often exercises are written in 4/4 and we mindlessly play them. Doing an exercise in 3/4 time will help warm up your mind as well as your body.

Remember to start at a slow tempo and use a big range of motion to the get your muscles loose. Use a metronome and track your progress. Try increasing the speed of the metronome by two beats per measure every time you repeat the exercise. (This can be done manually, or with the use of an app.)

Creating a warm-up routine is an individual process and what works for me will not necessarily work for everyone. Feel free to create your own routine! 

 

Check out the other postings in our Snare Drum Warm-Up series:

Part 1: Warming up the big muscles

Part 3: Accent patterns and wrist lifts

Part 4: Adding flams to the equation

Part 5: Wrap it up with rolls

 

The Principles of Musical Architecture

When I write songs, produce an artist or mix a project, I think in terms of architecture: musical architecture. I try to build a strong foundation on which to add multiple layers, weaving instrumentation into composition, with air and space providing the mortar that binds it all together.

Consider the tempo as being like the grading of land — the initial preparation for the blueprint (your song canvas) to be executed. Using that analogy, the kick drum pulse serves as the first pour of concrete slab; the snare, hi-hat, tom and percussion grooves define where the dividing walls will stand.

The bass guitar underpins and supports the foundation of the song with root and chordal/tone frameworks from which each tonal “floor” will ascend. Open-position triad chords strummed on an acoustic guitar ring out as the first floor of harmonic progression, while sweet 7th chords and piano inversions add color and additional floors of harmonic variation. The placement, phrasing and “pocket” that each instrument finds in the groove serve as the load-bearing and dividing walls, defining space and flow within the overall song construction.

Then come the melodies that adorn the musical structures we design. I often think of these as the intricate millwork, fabric, furnishings and brush strokes that take the limelight — the top-line notes that reside within the walls of chordal harmony.

Acoustic guitar leaning against a buffet table in a formal dining room.

Lyrics provide the roof and complete the edifice; personal, relatable words, delivered by the human voice in emotional performances of rhythm, rhyme and melody.

It’s only when we have a roadmap, a pre-production floor plan and a great team of musicians that we can forge our song into a residence that will stand for a very long time.

I’m expressing music to you in these terms because I often use visuals as a reminder of how I’d like my audio palette to sound. I mix tracks from left to right and from low to high, and I like to support each instrument with the one below it. Live performances can adhere to the same principles of musical architecture: a pyramid of lows to highs. And even the solo performer can select an instrument that fully supports the tone and volume of their voice.

As a singer/songwriter/performer, I am finely attuned to the frequency ranges and volume that many acoustic guitars offer. A full sized guitar like the FG-TA TransAcoustic, for example, may offer more bass and mid-range response than the compact, short-scale CSF3M parlor guitar, but which instrument is the best option to support my voice, complement my vocal range and not overpower me in an acoustic environment? These are the questions I ask myself when selecting an acoustic guitar.

The Challenge

I thought it would be interesting to record three different acoustic guitar shapes and sizes to compare their tones and find the best fit to support my voice. I know the guitar tone-woods will also have an effect on the sound but the purpose of this experiment was to get a general idea of how each instrument’s frequencies work with my vocal tone, and the song being played.

I decided to keep the vocal and guitar tracks totally separate so that none of the guitars would have an influence on how I sang the song, so I recorded my vocal over a piano and percussion track and then replaced those backing tracks with acoustic guitars once the vocal was finished.

The guitars I chose for the recording (and the video below) were as follows:

  • Yamaha FG-TA – A full-size western-style guitar with mahogany back and sides and a solid spruce top.
  • Yamaha A Series AC5R – A concert-size body with a cutaway, a solid rosewood back and sides, and a solid Sitka spruce top.
  • Yamaha CSF3M – A parlor guitar with a short-scale neck, a solid mahogany back and sides, and a solid Sitka spruce top.
Three acoustic guitars lined up from left to right largest to smallest.
Left to right: FG-TA, AC5R, CSF3M

My voice tends to occupy the lower frequency ranges, so I was really curious to hear how each guitar would support my vocal tone. While recording, I tried to keep the dynamics of my performance consistent, letting the instruments provide the tone and volume naturally. I used a tube microphone running into a tube preamp (with the EQ set flat) to capture both the guitar and vocals.

When recording the guitar parts, the mic was placed approximately 12 inches from the neck at a 45-degree angle to the 14th fret of each instrument. I then double-tracked each and panned the first take hard left and the second take hard right in the mix. I added a little Hall Reverb for ambience, but no compression was used on the guitars.

The Video

As you watch the video, try to focus not just on the tonal differences between the three guitars, but, more importantly, the way each blends with my voice. I felt that the two mahogany body guitars (the FG-TA and the CSF3M) sounded brighter to my ears and let my vocals sit out front of the performance better; I also think that either would sit nicely in a dense mix of multiple instruments. The rosewood AC5R sounds nice and warm to me — perfect for solo acoustic gigs — but I found myself listening to the guitar instead of the vocals in the recording.

The Wrap-Up

The vocal melody is the most important aspect of any song, and the instrument choices we make can either enhance or detract from the end result. Using the instrument that best supports the vocal is therefore key to getting optimum results.

Of course, there are many other factors that go into deciding which guitar to buy, such as comfort and playability — how it feels to your hands and body. And sure, we also want our instruments to look cool on stage … but not to the detriment of our music. So the next time you’re considering a new guitar, listen carefully to the tone, volume and sound it produces when accompanying your voice and ask yourself this important question: Does this instrument support, complement and allow your vocals to shine as the focal point in the performance? If it does, your choice just became a lot easier.

Photographs courtesy of the author.

 

Check out Robbie’s other postings.

Want to know more about how different woods affect the sound of guitars? Check out our blog article “A Brief Guide to Acoustic Guitar Tonewoods.

Click here for more information about Yamaha acoustic guitars.

Blocking Writer’s Block

You’re stuck. There is no word in the world that, as John Lennon put it, tells the truth and rhymes. You’re sure your song needs a bridge but what else is there to say? Or worse yet, you haven’t been inspired for weeks. Maybe you should have gone into accounting.

So you get angry with yourself. And scared. And insecure! If you were a real writer, material would be coming out of your ears, you say to yourself. If you were a real writer you’d be bursting with inspiration. But you’re empty. Will you ever get it back?

Smiling woman leaning on her elbow on the keys of a piano.
Me, waiting for “it” to come.

Listen, it happens to everyone. Trust me. Maybe some people won’t cop to it but it does. And it’s OK.

It’s just writer’s block — a temporary affliction. It’s hard to remember that, though, when you’re right smack in the middle of it. This isn’t the first time you’ve had it, right? Why is it so easy to forget that you survived it before?

It might cheer you to know that there are things you can do to relieve the frustration. But before you do any of them, stick with it … and write as much as you can. Journal (used here as a verb) or strum past the emptiness. Why? Because sometimes the magic line, melody or chord progression reveals itself five pages (or five measures) past the pain. And if that happens, don’t question it. Receive it as you would a gift. Open your arms to the heavens and just say “thank you.”

That said, if you’ve been at it for hours and you’re ready to pull your hair out …

Take a walk. Go for a drive. Do what you have to do to get away from your screen, your journal, your keyboard or your guitar. Go to the mall or the movies … but stay away from the fridge; no amount of emotional eating will free you up faster. Get a beer or a mani-pedi. My activity of choice is making soup. (Green pea and mint is my favorite.)

Stand up! Better yet, pace. The movement alone can stimulate thought and keep you from freezing up mentally. Go to the gym. Get your blood flowing. Hang upside down so it gets to your head! I do this for one minute after every work-out. It’s also therapeutic for back issues.

Or do the exact opposite: Take a nap. I’m serious. If we’re really-really-really-lucky, after hours of obsessing it’s possible to dream the answer. Then the trick is to wake up and document it ASAP. I’ve heard that we lose 90% of our dream recall within 10 minutes of waking up, and I believe it.

OK, so what if you’re in a writing session with collaborators and can’t head out or grab that nap? Either would be kind of rude, right? Well, then …

Excuse yourself for a toilet break, whether you need one or not. Get in there and shut the door. Sometimes when you’re alone and not feeling self-conscious about being on your game (which can happen, especially when you’re with other writers — people you understandably want to dazzle), a line or melody will come more naturally. At which point you can walk back into the room with the money.

If all these exercises fail, don’t panic. Take solace in the knowledge that creative shut-downs are actually quite constructive. They’re telling you that your unconscious needs to work on its own for a while without your help. The nerve! Yet isn’t it reassuring to know your brain is churning away even when you’re not actively in the driver’s seat? So why not let it?

In other words, Surrender!

Then don’t be surprised if, when you return to your work-in-progress, it all comes together without a hitch — a delayed result with no effort on your part. You already did the work.

So ignore writer’s block like the pesky fly on the wall that it is. Don’t give the debilitating power of writer’s block the dignity it wants to rob you of. Think of it as a staring contest and try not to be the first to laugh. Just keep staring. Eventually, you will win.

Photo courtesy of the author.

 

Check out Shelly’s other postings.

Jeff Coffin Video Series, Part 1: Shopping for Vinyl

Man in record store looking at a vinyl record.

Everyone needs a hobby. For Jeff Coffin, music lover and saxophonist with the Dave Matthews Band, it’s collecting records. He’s been doing it for years. Now that vinyl is making a comeback (and now that Yamaha has introduced a new wireless turntable to spin and stream your tunes to enjoy in any room of your home), we could all use a few pointers on how to shop for vinyl.

We recently met up with Jeff in Nashville and joined him on a visit to his local record store as he explained how to select vinyl for a personal collection. Take a look … and you might want to take some notes too!

Check out Part 2: Caring for Vinyl

Click here for more information about the Yamaha MusicCast VINYL 500 Wi-Fi turntable.

Snare Drum Warm-Up, Part 1

The first in a five-part series about developing the ideal snare drum warm-up routine.

As an educator and professional performer, I have noticed that over the years, my practice time has decreased for one reason or another. I have also found that the older I get, the harder it is for me to start playing without first warming up.

Creating a warm-up routine is an individual process and what works for me will not necessarily work for everyone. That said, a good warm-up:

1)  Is a reasonable length. If it is too short, it won’t be effective; if it is too long there won’t be enough time to do it every day. The routine I’ll be presenting in these articles takes just 10 – 15 minutes from start to finish.

2)  Starts with big muscles and moves to smaller muscles.

3)  Evolves over time. As you learn new repertoire, you need to adapt the warm-up to help with the technical demands.

Element #1: Warming Up the Big Muscles

The goal of this exercise is to get your big muscles moving. It’s also a time to forget about everything else that is going on in your life and listen to the sound you are creating on your instrument.

Musical annotation.

Start with a classic “8 on a hand”:

Then move on to a “clone” of the exercise:

Musical annotation.

(This term comes from Teaching Percussion by Gary Cook. He uses “cloning” to mean having both hands playing at the same time.)

Advanced players can add this exercise, which incorporates different stroke types:

Musical annotation.

F = Full Stroke, D = Down Stroke, U = Up Stroke

Remember to start at a slow tempo and use a big range of motion to get your muscles loose. Use a metronome and track your progress.

Check out the other postings in our Snare Drum Warm-Up series:

Part 2: Transitioning to the small muscles

Part 3: Accent patterns and wrist lifts

Part 4: Adding flams to the equation

Part 5: Wrap it up with rolls

Selecting a PA System for Your Worship Venue

Ready to install a sound system in your House of Worship? You won’t want to miss this video, with Yamaha product manager John Schauer presenting tips for determining the amount of amplifier wattage needed for your sanctuary as well as the number of required mixer inputs and outputs. He also discusses the advantage of using powered speaker systems with integrated mixers and amps.

Click here to find out more about Yamaha professional audio products.

Genius Is As Genius Does

We all have our musical heroes. If you’re like me, you probably think of one or more of them as “geniuses.”

But are they really worthy of the term?

In a recent posting I talked about the art of arranging, citing the genius of Brian Wilson as an example. It’s an appellation often given to the famed leader of the Beach Boys, and in his case I think it’s justified, but as I was writing the piece it got me thinking about what the word actually means.

Handwritten notes.
Steve Lacy’s notebook, with tips from Monk.

The Oxford Dictionary tells us that it signifies “exceptional intellectual or creative power or other natural ability.” But I feel that a far better definition was provided by Thelonious Monk. The legendary jazz pianist was almost as well known for his dispensations of wisdom as he was for his distinctive composing and playing skills. As scribbled down by one of his sidemen (soprano sax player Steve Lacy) in a spiral-bound notebook way back in 1960, Monk’s primer of do’s and don’ts have become a kind of bible for musicians everywhere.

There’s lots of timeless advice here (“What you don’t play can be more important than what you do play”; “A note can be small as a pin or as big as the world, it depends on your imagination”), but the observation that’s made the most impact on me is this one:

“Whatever you think can’t be done, somebody will come along and do it. A genius is the one most like himself.”

There have been many inspiring examples of people coming along and doing the “impossible” throughout history. From the light bulb to recorded sound (incredibly, both inventions from the mind of one man — Thomas Edison), from the automobile to the airplane, from the telephone to the smartphone, from the computer to the internet, these are all parts of our everyday life that would have seemed unthinkable not all that long ago.

But more importantly, I think, is the second part of Monk’s assertion. What he’s saying (much more poetically than I ever could) is that a genius has to be an individual and have the courage of their convictions … no matter what.

Brian Wilson faced ridicule in the early stages of his career. His soaring falsetto was viewed by many at the time as “sissy” music, and many of his initial songs — driven by record company pressure to cash in on fads such as surfing and hotrods — were characterized by puerile lyrics and simplistic melody lines. But even as a teenager, Brian knew that the music deep inside him had worth, and he kept at it. Eventually he matured into one of the twentieth century’s most inventive and influential songwriters, giving the world masterpieces like “God Only Knows” and “Good Vibrations.”

Man at sound board.
Humberto Gatica.

It’s fine to be influenced by your heroes, at least early in your musical career. But the ultimate path to genius lies in being yourself. Some years ago, I had the opportunity to interview veteran engineer Humberto Gatica (who’s worked with a star-studded list of artists that includes Celine Dion, Barbra Streisand and Josh Groban), and the advice he offered to aspiring young record producers and musicians came down to just that. Here’s what he had to say:

“Be open to trying things, and you will find your sound. At the end of the day, it’s what you think sounds good and what feels good to you. It might be in line with other people who will want to work with you because they love the way you hear things. Or it might work against you because they don’t like what you do.” In other words, irregardless of opinion, you need to follow your own path.

So be unafraid. Do the undoable. Be yourself. Have the courage of your convictions and the strength to stand by them even in the face of adversity. Achieve these goals and someday you just might find yourself on someone’s list of musical heroes (not just your mom’s! LOL) … and they might even think of you as a genius.

Photo of Humberto Gatica courtesy of Uno Productions.

 

Check out Howard’s other postings.

Six Things You Never Knew About Trombone

Uniquely among brass instruments, trombones have a slide, used to alter the pitch as it is extended and shortened. Though originally created in the mid-15th century, trombones have continued to evolve through the years.

Here are six things even experienced trombone players may not know about their instrument:

1. The Name Came from Drawing Swords

Band with trombone and clarinet like instruments being played.
16th century Flemish painting depicting the trombone.

Until the 18th century the trombone was called a “saqueboute” (in French) or a “sackbut” (in English). Although opinions vary on the etymology, some sources (such as The New Grove Dictionary of Musical Instruments) suggest that the word comes from the French word “sacquer,” which means to draw out (a sword or the like). The instrument may have gotten its name due to the act of sliding a tube out to lengthen it resembling that of a swordsman drawing a sword from a scabbard.

The current name of the instrument means “large trumpet.” In German this instrument is called a “posaune,” which originally meant “trumpet.” This is because the trombone and trumpet are like relatives sharing the same ancestor, although trombones have a somewhat wider pitch range than trumpets.

2. The Trombone Was Once a Sacred Instrument

Trombones have been used in a variety of situations, including the courts of aristocrats, churches, and in military bands. However, beginning in the 18th century the instrument was seldom used in secular music. Instead, it was used much more often in religious settings such as in church services. Trombones have a range similar to that of the human voice and are capable of producing awe-inspiring harmonies during concerts, so they began to be treated as “divine instruments.” Composers of the era therefore generally refrained from using trombones in music outside of masses, oratorios, or other religious music.

3. “Fate” Changed the Fate of the Trombone

Beethoven was the first to use trombones — until that point seen as religious instruments — in a secular symphony. “Symphony No. 5 in C minor, Op. 67” (“Fate”), first played in 1808, was the first symphony in which a trombone was used. Beethoven would go on to use trombones again in “Symphony No. 6 in F major, Op. 68” (“Pastoral Symphony”) and “Symphony No. 9 in D minor, Op. 125” (“The Choral”), building a foundation for the trombone to stand as a fixture in orchestras in the 19th century.

4. There Are a Variety of Trombones, In a Variety of Pitch Ranges

Trombones are made in a variety of ranges approximating the range of the human voice, including soprano, alto, tenor, and bass trombones:

Graphic of four trombones from largest to smallest.
Various different trombones.

 

Graphic showing different trombones and related ranges.
Trombone pitch ranges.

Trombones are generally played by extending and shortening the slide, which changes the length of the tubing and thus the pitch of the sound. Because the slide needs to be extended farther and farther from the body to reach positions far from the body, some unique technology is required to play the instrument smoothly.

The standard trombone is the tenor trombone. It is used in a wide variety of musical genres, including classical, jazz and pop music.

Photo of trombone.
Yamaha YSL-881 tenor trombone.

Tenor bass trombones are designed with an extra attachment of tubing called an “F attachment” for an expanded bass range. This also allows the same pitch to be played without the player having to extend his or her arm so far. However, large bore tenor bass trombones require the player to be able to blow a lot of air into the instrument. They are therefore better suited for advanced players. Medium bore instruments are recommended for beginners.

Photo of trombone.
Yamaha YSL-882 tenor bass trombone.

Bass trombones feature an even wider bore size than tenor bass trombones, and are equipped with one or two pieces of tubing to supplement its bass range. Other than the bore size being wider, these instruments are generally identical to tenor bass trombones. However, a bass trombone usually features a second extra attachment of tubing for an even lower range and easier slide technique when playing low. They also use a mouthpiece with a larger diameter to make it easier to produce lower sounds with a good tone quality.

Photo of trombone.
Yamaha YBL-830 bass trombone.

5. Jazz Trombones and Symphony Trombones Are Quite Different

There are two very different ends of the spectrum when considering the types of trombones in common use today: jazz trombones on one end and symphony trombones (for playing in an orchestra) on the other. Some of the parts on these two kinds of instruments vary. Especially noticeable is the size of the bell:

Photo of small and large trombone bells.
Left: Jazz trombone; Right: Symphony trombone.
Photo.
Left: Jazz trombone; Right: Symphony trombone.

A jazz trombone has a smaller bell, thinner walls, and a smaller bore size. The gap in the slide is also narrower. Jazz models are designed this way to make the instrument smaller and increase slide mobility. This allows the player to move quickly from note to note.

In contrast, symphony models tend to be larger overall (with a larger bell too) and are therefore able to produce a more robust sound. A trombone needs to produce sound that is loud enough to reach members of the audience in the back row — all the way from the rear of an orchestra that may have more than 80 members. A symphony trombone can actually be one of the loudest instruments in the orchestra.

6. It’s Possible to Raise The Pitch Even As You Extend the Slide

In general, the longer the tube, the lower the note. However, trombone players can play higher notes as they extend the slide, simply by adjusting their embouchure to play a note in a higher acoustic partial — a technique that’s helpful when playing anything from a quick jazz solo to a Beethoven symphony.

Don’t believe it can be done? Check out this video:

This posting is adapted from the Yamaha Musical Instrument Guide.

For more information about Yamaha trombones click here.

 

How Do You Roll?

There are many techniques a percussionist must learn in order to become a well-rounded musician. Fortunately, many of them are applicable on a variety of percussion instruments. The roll is the perfect example.

Maintaining a smooth, clear and clean roll is difficult. This article will provide you with a number of exercises that can be added to your warm-up routine to help improve your roll. Each begins with the foundation (the pattern with which your hands move), followed by a roll. The exercises can be practiced utilizing double, triple or multiple bounce rolls. Also included are exercises that start and end on different hands to improve the technique of the non-dominant hand.

Many educators are of the opinion that the roll is best produced using an arm stroke, where the tips of the sticks stay closer to the drumhead, since this aids in controlling the distance between the bounces of the roll.

Exercise A – Continuous Motion Exercise

Muscial annotation.

We recommend that you use an arm stroke for both the foundation (measures 1 and 3) and the roll exercises (measures 2 and 4). This will help stress the importance of using the arm.

Exercise B – Additive Process Exercise

Musical annotation.

Click here for more exercises.

Tips

As with any new technique, be sure to practice slowly. Here are some tips to help you succeed:

1)   Set aside 10-15 minutes every day to work on your roll technique.

2)   Record yourself to make sure you are not learning any bad habits. Compare these recordings weekly to track your progress.

3)   Practice in front of a mirror so you can see your hand position.

4)   Use a metronome. Start with a slow tempo and increase it gradually.

With regular practice and repetition, you’ll soon see an improvement in your overall sound and technique.

Resources

Looking for additional resources to improve your roll? Check out these books:

1)   The Modern Concert Snare Drum Roll by William James

2)   The Roll by Emil Shollee

3)   Developing Dexterity by Mitchell Peters

Utilizing Modeling Technology

Keyboard samples and drum machines have been used to emulate real instruments in popular music for decades now. In the guitar world, the current trend is to “model” key components in the effects/amp signal chain in order to replicate the sound of a processed, amplified instrument.

Gray microphone with Line 6 Helix device as background.

The Line 6 Helix®is a great example of how modeling technology has progressed. This device makes it possible for anyone to access the sound of a range of boutique amplifiers and custom effects in one feature-laden guitar rig, weighing in at only 14 pounds.

Black guitar and pedalboard cases.

I use my Helix to process my vocals and guitar playing for warm-ups, recording, video and film gigs, trade show presentations, and stage performances all over the world. Helix gives me all of my sounds in a studio quality stereo rig, and all of my song sets are stored and ready to go without any further setup — plus I can listen to everything, via headphones, in the comfort of my hotel room. It’s like traveling with two 4 x 12 cabinets, an amp head, and a pedalboard … and, as a bonus, I can put them all in a backpack that fits nicely in the overhead compartment of any commercial aircraft!

In recent years, manufacturers have also begun modeling the sound of high quality microphones, which can be used in conjunction with Digital Audio Workstation (DAW) and plug-in software. This technology is also available in the onboard acoustic guitar preamps of many Yamaha guitars. For example, the SRT2 (Studio Response Technology) system in the A Series A5 and A3 guitars offers tube and ribbon microphone models that can be blended with a traditional under-saddle piezo pickup to produce a wide range of studio quality, live performance tones.

The Video

Photo of an AC5R Yamaha guitar bend control.

The AC5R that I’m playing in this video features two microphone options at the push of a blend control knob. Mic Type 1 is a model of the legendary Neumann U67 large diaphragm condenser microphone, while Mic Type 2 is a model of an equally iconic Royer R122 active ribbon microphone.

Running a cable from the output jack of the guitar into my audio interface allowed me to directly record all the sounds that you hear in the video. No expensive microphones or outboard preamps were needed, so setup time was minimal, allowing me to focus on the creative aspects of my performance.

I used an equal blend of piezo and Neumann U67 mic model for the two strummed rhythm parts, and an even blend of the Royer R122 mic model and piezo pickup for the double-stop and single note lines. I kept the onboard EQ controls on the AC5R flat but added a touch of compression and reverb in the mix.

The Parts

Rhythm Guitar 1

The first rhythm guitar track features chords that are all derived from the E major scale. I’m letting the top two strings ring out on all of the open chords.

This part consists of an eight-bar progression with a tonal center of the E chord (I) Ionian:

1                  1                   5               6m            6m

I: Eadd2  I      Eadd2          Badd4  I     C#m7  I   C#m7 I

4                2m                   5              5              4/5

I  Aadd2  I   F#m7(add4) I  Badd4  I   Badd4        A/B :I

Rhythm Guitar 2

I used a capo at the fourth fret and played the same harmonic progression using the following chord shapes (again, the key is E; the shapes are in relation to the capo):

1             1         5           6m         6m

I:     C     I     C      G/B    I   Am7  I   Am7  I

4            2m        5           5          4/5

I      F     I   Dm7   I    G     I    G         F/G :I

If you understand the CAGED guitar system, transposing with a capo will be easy for you. Take a moment to analyze the first guitar part and place the scale position number above each of the chords. (I’ve done that for you on both charts.)

Now use those scale position numbers in the key of C to give you the chord shapes for your second guitar part:

Guy playing a guitar chord.
Double-Stop Chops

Double-stops are two notes of a different pitch, played at the same time. You can also think of them as chord fragments.

In this video, I’m using diatonic 6ths from the key of E to produce those melodic lines. Think in terms of outlining the chord progression first by locating double-stop shapes from within the rhythm guitar part chords. You can add connecting flourishes (as I do here) by connecting those shapes with other diatonic 6ths.

Single Note Lines

The single note lines are all coming from the E major scale. I end the double-stop phrased solo with a nice descending crescendo line on the last two measures. I’m muting the initial lines of the second half of the solo to add definition, energy, and variation … not easy to do on an acoustic guitar with no effects! You’ll also notice that I end the solo with an unmuted crescendo line for two bars.

The Wrap-Up

It’s all about phrasing — the rhythmic delivery of your melodic message. I’m always thinking about the phrasing aspect of each and every line. When I improvise, I listen to the groove and the harmony to find the “pocket” for the melody lines to sit in. And the latest technology makes the process of capturing the magic easier than ever before.

Photographs courtesy of the author.

Check out Robbie’s other postings.

 

Click here for more information about the Line 6 Helix.

Click here for more information about Yamaha A Series guitars.

Violinist Christian Howes’ Three Pillars of Pedagogy

In the blog post, Christian Howes: Versatile Violin Virtuoso, renowned strings performer and educator Christian Howes explains why he started Creative Strings Academy.

His pedagogy is comprised of what he calls “a trifecta of pillars” in order to expand students’ understanding of music.

Pillar 1: Break Down the Music

Howes advises that students learn not only their own parts but also examine how those parts fit into the whole. “What’s happening in the melodies?” he asks. “What’s happening in the countermelodies?”

Pillar 2: Nurture Creative Abilities

When Howes does a school residency, he teaches students about composition, arranging and improvisation. “[Teach] them how to nurture their natural creative abilities in a musical context,” he says.

Pillar 3: Expose Students to Different Styles

Instructors should expose students to a variety of musical traditions. Connecting different cultures was one of Howes’ main goals when he started Creative Strings Academy. “The purpose is to help people feel more connected, to change the music education community at large, to make it more integrated,” he says.

This article originally appeared in the 2018 V2 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Christian Howes: Versatile Violin Virtuoso

At 15 years old, violin virtuoso Christian Howes found himself envious of his school’s last-chair second violinist. Howes recalls how that classmate was composing and recording his own original songs.

“He couldn’t play his way out of a paper bag, [but] … he was writing his own songs,” Howes recalls. “I remember feeling a pang of jealousy because I thought, ‘He’s creating something of his own.’ … The thing about creativity is [that] it’s the ultimate equalizer.”

Howes had been classically trained throughout his childhood, beginning in the Suzuki program at age 5, and he had spent the past few summers in conservatory programs. But the admiration that Howes felt for his classmate inspired him to step out of his comfort zone and try something new — forming a rock band with his friends. “I started to discover things about music that I hadn’t discovered as a classical violinist,” he says.

Now Howes is a world-renowned performer and educator, and he is recognized for his willingness to step outside of traditional string genres. After serving as an associate professor at Berklee College of Music in Boston for three years, Howes founded Creative Strings Academy in 2011, a not-for-profit focused on encouraging creativity and originality within strings education.

Through Creative Strings Academy, Howes provides a variety of educational services — online lessons, instructional YouTube videos and podcasts, and hands-on experiences such as school visits. He also runs workshops that have been held in Ohio, Texas and North Carolina as well as in Toronto, London and Lausanne, Switzerland. Howes’ online academy has reached at least 50,000 string players; his YouTube videos have exceeded a million views; and approximately 150 adult and youth musicians participate in the Creative Strings Academy workshop and festival in Columbus, Ohio — in its 16th year — each summer.

Unique Approach: “Opening the Hood of Music”

violinist Christian Howes

In music just as with any other creative arts, a basic understanding of the art form’s construction is needed in order to be creative, Howes says. “We can’t be creative with information we don’t have already,” he states.

For musicians to bring their own perspectives to a piece, they must first study its inner workings. “This is opening the hood of music,” Howes says. “Imagine a racecar driver who goes fast, but they open up the hood and don’t know what’s there.”

In Creative Strings Academy’s school residency program, Howes encourages students of all ages — from elementary school to high school and college, as well as private studios — to use this “opening-the-hood” approach. How? By taking apart a constructed piece of music, examining its individual parts and understanding how those parts fit into the song as a whole.

“If you think about a classical string player, [he or she is] focused on playing a melodic line as crisply and beautifully as possible, not paying attention to the broader view of all these parts,” he says. “It’s [about] presenting that [information] in a way that can be useful for classical string players. That can relate to the internalization of harmonic information, rhythmic information, the groove, the different parts of each song.”

Once students have knowledge of music theory and an understanding of how different songs are arranged, they can start to formulate their own ideas about music. “If you tried to write a piece in Spanish, that might be difficult if you don’t know Spanish,” Howes says. “We [give students] clear choices that conform to the knowledge they’re already comfortable with. You’re going to be creative within the parameters given to you — which is sort of an irony to creativity. There’s so much freedom; it’s paralyzing.”

Composing Creativity

violin case with one acoustic violin and one electric violin

One of Howes’ goals with Creative Strings Academy is to empower students by giving them an outlet to develop their own musical style. He believes that composition, arranging and improvisation should be part of every musician’s education.

“When you teach kids to compose, you show them they are creative,” Howes says. “A lot of classical musicians have this belief [that] ‘I’m not creative; I can’t do that.’ To give kids [the opportunity to say], ‘I made that,’ is really empowering.”

Music educators value Howes’ focus on com­position and improvisation. Students from Blue Valley Unified School District in Overland Park, Kansas, participated in Howes’ workshop during one of his school residencies. “[Improvisation is] part of the ‘whole person’ in learning music,” said Kathleen McCullough, retired Blue Valley orchestra director. “If you teach music, you should be teaching all music, not just one corner of it.”

Having the ability to showcase creativity also removes the hierarchy that often comes with a competitive musical ensemble. “In the world of first [chair], second, third, fourth, last, we want to show [students] that even if [they are] not first chair, they can make just as big a splash by having the courage to create and follow whatever their voice is,” Howes says.

As an innovator in his field, Howes believes in sharing his knowledge with a range of people. Consequently, his extensive online platform covers topics from instructional videos about how to play blues scales on a violin to advice on how to run your musical career like a business. “The willingness to share [my] creativity was a big motivation for me,” Howes says. “As a teacher, I’m trying to model that for other people as well.”

By putting his art out there for millions of people to see, Howes is hoping to debunk the myth that musicians — and artists at large — should be private about their work. “Classical musicians [tend to] hide it in a practice room, like it’s private,” Howes says. “No! Share music in the world. It’s about community. Play music with your family; play on street corners; [play] at church.”

Transcending Genre

Since his high school rock band days, Howes has embodied the importance of breaking free from the confines of musical genre. “There were guys in the rock band who’d had one or two lessons,” Howes says. “I’d had a thousand, but they seemed to know things about music that I was totally unfamiliar with. Thinking about the chord progression, learning a different rhythmic vocabulary … I started thinking about improvising.”

When he started college at The Ohio State University, he began to play bass in a jazz band and soon joined a blues band as well. He spent much of his early 20s playing gospel music in church services, which led to his appreciation for the influence of many different cultures on music as a whole. “Whether you’re talking about Appalachian music, Latin music, jazz, punk, gospel, blues, a lot of it had to do with the African-American influence on Americana music,” Howes says. “It was playing in gospel church services every Sunday [that] had an impact on me.”

Howes believes that for musicians to develop their own voice, they should first listen to as many genres and musical traditions as they can. “It’s [about] having a more multicultural perspective,” he says. “There are all these beautiful traditions out there, and we should go deeper to understand them.”

In his high school and college days, Howes would experience a musical awakening whenever he saw live performances of different genres. “I was hungry to grow,” he says. “When I’d have that encounter, it would make me realize [that] there’s so much more I want to learn about this aspect of music or this vehicle of expression.”

Howes feels that his experiences playing in a variety of styles and genres has made him the successful musician he is today. “I collected these different toolkits and perspectives,” he says. “Earlier on, [I] was trying to fit into these traditions, from rock ‘n’ roll to Latin or jazz. But as I matured, I realized that the real goal is to find my own sound.”

This article originally appeared in the 2018 V2 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Tips to Manage Workload and Find Work-Life Balance

The job of a music teacher can be overwhelming with so many activities to juggle. As we begin a new school year, it’s the ideal time to reevaluate your responsibilities and make a plan for workload management.

Then, you can be at the top of your game professionally while maintaining your personal life.

I teach winds and percussion full-time at Metea Valley (Illinois) High School, including directing the bands and symphony orchestra. I also teach graduate-level professional development classes at VanderCook College of Music in Chicago. I perform professionally as a percussionist, and I play music at my church. I’ve been married for 15 years and have five children, ages 2 to 11. I also finished my first marathon this year!

I volunteer as much as I can, having served on the board of two not-for-profit music organizations. I am an educational consultant for the Music Achievement Council and a representative-elect for the Illinois Music Education Association.

People constantly ask me, “Glen, how do you do it all? With five kids, high school band, part-time college, how do you find time for all of that?”

I usually reply, “I’m sure you are just as busy as me!”

In the 18 years that I’ve been teaching, I have figured out that the secret to work-life balance is planning. Plan your tasks, workload and personal time, and stick to it. Here are some processes I use, so I don’t feel overwhelmed.

1. Sort Paperwork

Paperwork drove me crazy because I tried to get through it all the same day. I would get frustrated because I couldn’t get it all done. Now I use a desk pile system called the “7-7-7.”
Gather all of your assignments, bills and receipts, printed out emails and lesson-planning documents. Then separate them into three piles.

The first pile is work that must be done in the next 7 minutes. Realistically, I get through this pile during my 45-minute planning period. The items in the second pile must be addressed in 7 hours. The third pile are the things that must be done in 7 days. Rebalance these piles daily, so that you always know what must be done and when.

I never take home paperwork — ever. If you leave things at school, you will become more efficient while you are at work.

2. Sort Email

Another way to simplify your life is to use an email management system called “zero inbox.” Once you open a message from your inbox, you reply immediately, or you put it in the trash or an action folder. Realistically, my inbox will look great for a few weeks, and then I need to spend 20 minutes cleaning it up again.

3. Enjoy and Share

I used to think that once I mastered all of my work-related stuff, then I could solely focus on the other things in my life. Wrong!

By planning time for personal activities, I found that sharing those experiences helps me explain ideas from different perspectives, enriching class discussions and student relationships. For example, I told my students about my marathon training, and they were a huge motivation throughout the process.

4. Evaluate Priorities

I realistically can’t do everything, so I have had to give things up from time to time. When I was serving as a board member for two not-for-profits, I realized that I only had time for one. I decided to give up the position of website designer for ARTSpeaks because it was not as purposeful as the position I had with the Alyssa Alvin Foundation for Hope, where I serve as an educational consultant.

5. Plan Ahead with Co-Workers

The music department staff at Metea Valley doesn’t have planning time built into our daily schedule. So we decided to meet every week for 30 minutes at 6:45 a.m., which has saved us many hours of chaos. We actually solve a lot of problems during these weekly meetings because we know who is doing what and who is leading particular events or projects.

6. Develop Yourself

The more classes, seminars and conventions I attend or books that I read, the more motivated I am. Consider starting a master’s degree or taking a professional development class at a nearby college or online. Online classes are convenient because there is no travel time, and you can connect with teachers and classmates across your state and the entire country.

In my continuing education, I have met others with whom I share ideas, successes and failures in the classroom and in my life. This networking is so important!

This article originally appeared in the 2018 V2 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Scheduling Advice from a High School Band Director

In Case Study: A Successful Band Program in a Border Town, we met Dena Laurel, head director of the Roma High School band, who built a successful program despite being located in a remote and impoverished area.

Laurel employs a very precise scheduling and pacing strategy to maximize instructional time with her students. Here is a glimpse of her planning technique.

1. Start at the End: Figure out where you want the program to be at the end of the season and work backward, using a calendar and lesson plans. “Work smarter, not harder,” Laurel says.

2. Plan for Setbacks: To allow for weather, emergencies or other challenges, choose a date to have your show (or concert pieces) completed at least one to two weeks earlier than the end of your season. “You can always cancel practice, but you can’t add more,” Laurel says.

3. Set Realistic Expectations: When scheduling, think about the realities, capabilities and history of your band. “Figure out how to pace it,” Laurel says. “How much time does it take your band to take in that amount of information?”

4. Make Every Second Count: Laurel likes to plan every second of rehearsal, so that there’s not a down moment. “Right now, I could tell you exactly what part we’re going to learn on a particular weekend in August,” she says. “I can tell you exactly when I’m going to have my show finished. I can tell you which weeks we’re going to work on which parts of the show.”

5. Communicate: A plan won’t work unless everyone knows what’s expected of them. Laurel shares the schedule with students and parents electronically. Each student knows exactly what they need to learn and by when.

6. Stay on Target: Deviate from your plan as little as possible and don’t second-guess the pacing you set. “Have faith that the plan that you make will get you exactly where you want to be,” Laurel says. “Trust your relationship with the kids and their playing as well.”

This article originally appeared in the 2018 V2 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Case Study: A Successful Band Program in a Texas Border Town

In a sprawling state like Texas, it might be easy to overlook the small town of Roma that sits along the Rio Grande on the U.S.-Mexico border.  But that would be a mistake because the Roma Independent School District has cultivated a unique and successful music program thanks in large part to Dena Laurel, who came to Roma High School as an assistant band director in 1997 and then moved up to become director of bands in 2008.

Although the majority of Roma High School families struggle financially, the 220 students in the band thrive on hard work, organizational ingenuity and community support.

Under Laurel’s leadership and tutelage, Roma High School has performed at several prestigious competitions. In 2017, the band played at Texas’ University Interscholastic League (UIL) State Marching Band Contest at San Antonio’s Alamodome, where it placed 11th in 5A competition. At the Bands of America (BOA) Super Regional, Roma High School took home the Class AA championship in 2016.

In concert band, Roma has had even greater success. At the Texas Music Educators Association Honor Band competition, the high school band placed seventh in 2018, and Roma Middle School placed second in 2016.

Daily Instruction, Lifelong Mentorship

Dena Laurel

A focus on instrumental technique with more personalized instruction helps the Roma band program defy expectation. With the next closest city and colleges about an hour or more away, private lessons are simply not an option, even if the students could afford it. That’s why Roma’s band department turns its extremely rural location into its biggest asset.

Between the high school and two middle schools, Roma has a team of 12 band instructors, each specializing in one instrument. Though they each have a primary campus, they drive to all three schools every day to teach their specific students.

“When I was teaching French horn, it was almost [like] a college setting, like I was running a studio,” Laurel says.

In middle school, students focus almost completely on working with their teachers by section, with the band as a whole coming together only when preparing for a competition or performance.

“I think it’s one of the best programs in Texas because it provides a teacher for each instrument, which is not very common,” says Orlando Medrano, a Roma alumnus who returned to the program as a tech and is now a professional musician. “The students gain more knowledge and become more competent in playing.”

Beyond the technical advantages, having the same teacher for six years results in lifelong mentorship. “We have a really special bond with the students, and we get to watch them grow,” says Corey Graves, Roma Middle School head director and district euphonium teacher.

Currently, nearly 50 percent of the incoming sixth graders join the band program each year. Laurel and her team focus on recruitment with high-energy classroom visits and band performances for fifth graders. “We have all the teachers leave some time in the schedule for recruitment,” Laurel says. “There are so many music programs here that if we didn’t, [all the students would] gravitate to the mariachi or Mexican Banda programs just because they’ve grown up in that culture. They don’t really know what a concert band is or [what it] does.”

Motivated, Not Deflated

Roma High School band director Dena Laurel walks with the drum major and other band members.

The lack of funds can sometimes be discouraging, but Laurel and her team constantly reinforce a “never-give-up” outlook that brings the community together. Whether with chocolate bars, catalogs or football game concessions, the students and parents constantly fundraise because band fees would be impossible to collect.

“I have parents and band moms who come in after school and make tons of spaghetti because they know that after practice, there’s not going to be any food at home for the kids,” Laurel says. “Though all the families are poor, those that have a little more money give as much as they can.”

When competing in UIL or BOA, Roma comes into contact with bands of very different sizes and situations, some with electronics, props or new instruments. “The amount of money on the field [at these competitions] is extremely intimidating, but I always tell everyone it doesn’t matter — it’s about playing better and marching cleaner,” Laurel says.

As a student, Medrano says that he and his bandmates viewed the exposure to other programs as motivation. “It’s something that we looked forward to seeing every time we went to a competition because although we couldn’t afford all those things, we worked just as hard as them,” Medrano says. “We matched their level of musicianship and did the best we could on the marching field even though we didn’t have what they could provide. A lot of times those bands would have higher scores than us, but it never phased us, and we just worked even harder.”

Engaging Experts

According to Medrano and Graves, Laurel’s willingness to delegate and ask for help is one of her greatest strengths. “She is an outstanding leader; she has a big program that requires a high level of commitment and organization,” Graves says. “She delegates responsibilities to those who are really great at what they do, and that’s what helps the program.”

Laurel’s dedication is noted and ap­preciated by more than those associated with the band program. In 2018, she was recognized as the district’s Secondary Teacher of the Year.

Roma often brings in clinicians or outside help to work with the band. “[Laurel] brought a lot of people who were experts in the field of marching band or music-making and was never afraid to let other people teach her band,” Medrano says. “She … understands when something needs to be done that she can’t do. That’s something that I learned from her.”

Because Laurel studied music per­formance and not education in college, she says that asking for help and guidance was a saving grace in her early years as a band director, and she continues to consult others. “Don’t be afraid to reach out,” she says. “The worst thing that can happen is that they say, ‘no.’ [But] they’re usually excited to help and excited for your program to do well because that’s another great program that they’re affiliated with.”

This article originally appeared in the 2018 V2 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Add Sound Reinforcement

In its 2017 show titled “Resurgence,” the Arcadia (California) High School Apache Marching Band used electronic sound design including amplification of soloists to create a unique aesthetic for its program.

Like Arcadia, many ensembles now incorporate sound reinforcement — microphones, amplifiers, signal processors and other electronic elements — to enhance the band’s volume, to project soloists or sections, or to add voiceovers and synthesizers to the music.

Arcadia percussion instructors Kevin Shah and Tony Nuñez emphasize the importance of making sound design part of the show rather than as its own separate element.

“Have the sound element be integrated and part of the soundtrack rather than just sitting on top of it,” says Shah, who is also the creative director and percussion composer and arranger for the Blue Knights Drum and Bugle Corps, based in Denver, Colorado. “When it’s done really well, it’s part of the fabric of the production. It’s not overbearing but not underproduced.”

Nuñez, a sound design specialist as well as art director for the Riverside (California) City College Indoor Percussion, suggests focusing on the show theme and musical development rather than putting too much emphasis on technology. “People get stuck on the tools instead of focusing on the musical message or student experience,” he says. “Use limited tools to create maximum effect.”

Seek Expert Help

Kevin Shah

To get started, music educators should use resources offered through marching organizations to learn more about sound design. For example, The Arcadia Music and Arts Symposium offers master classes, workshops, roundtable discussions, performances and other activities for both students and directors. In addition, WGI Sport of the Arts has a series of educational downloads that provide information about sampling, synthesizers and amplification for indoor drumlines.

“When you start to invest in equipment, it can get overwhelming,” Shah says. “There are a ton of resources out there. Try to connect with people who already have experience and soak in the information.”

Invest for Now and the Future

With a large variety of equipment and technology available, Nuñez says sound design equipment should be specific to the program’s needs rather than generic. “It’s about what the music needs to do, the budget, and what the show needs to accomplish,” he says.

Shah advises educators to invest in equipment that will help carry their programs forward. For example, buy a mixer with the ability to purchase expanders when the need for more channels arises.

“Always [keep] learning, updating gear [and] maximizing what you have,” he says. “When you get to a point where the band needs to grow, have the ability to do so.”

Consider Balance and Blend

Tony Nuñez

Once an ensemble has the appropriate equipment, let designers experiment with the technology, Nuñez suggests. “Empower the designers to think about it as a design tool,” he says. “Experiment for a time, then say, ‘What can we do?’ If you’re all on the same page, you can start with an idea, experiment, then find your way.”

Using sound reinforcement to bring out certain elements of a marching show requires careful blending of timbre and volume. For example, Shah suggests focusing sound reinforcement on front ensemble musicians as the instruments are intended for an indoor setting. With amplification, musicians can play the instruments correctly without making adjustments for volume.

In addition, many ensembles use sound design and reinforcement to enhance individual elements, including soloists and voiceovers. In Arcadia’s “Resurgence” show, amplified synthesizer effects in the beginning of the program allowed the ensemble to build up to its first impact. Shah says that using electronics effectively helps the entire ensemble rather than just a select few.

“It gives more character to the sound, and depending on the type of show, it’s going to give it more of a rich texture,” Shah says. “It’s an opportunity to enhance the sound of your group.”

Teach Technology to Students

Both Shah and Nuñez emphasize that while directors need to understand the equipment themselves, they must pass along that wisdom to their students. “Take the time to work it out, ask questions, do trial and error, and really help them fully understand,” Nuñez says.

Shah says that students should fully understand how to operate the technology. “I try to make sure every student [involved] is taught how everything works and what to do when something goes wrong,” he says. “With any sort of equipment, there will be failures, and being able to troubleshoot effectively is another huge component to training your students.”

In the end, sound design gives directors an opportunity to make their shows stand out, especially in competitive settings where ensembles have similar instrumentation. “For modern ensembles, [sound design] is a way to enhance the acoustic ensemble and use it as a storytelling device,” Shah says.

This article originally appeared in the 2018 V2 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Bring a Sense of Joy into Elementary Music Classes

Many successful people’s careers were shaped in part by their experiences as young music-makers.

That’s what these following people have in common: Condoleeza Rice, former U.S. Secretary of State; Jerry Gay, an engineer who helped build the Hubble telescope; Alan Greenspan, former Federal Reserve Chairman; Richard Carranza, chancellor of the New York City Public Schools; and Steven Spielberg, renowned American filmmaker.

In an article titled “Seeing the World through the Eyes of a Child,” Lisa Rosas, an entrepreneur and inventor, asks, “Have you ever noticed at a certain age we stop playing and become more attuned to responsibilities and to things that need to get done?”

Rosas then reflects upon how, when watching children in their natural settings, we observe “authenticity, vulnerability, laughter, tears and pure joy.”

As music educators, we need to bring that authenticity and sense of pure joy into our music classrooms starting in elementary school.

A Nurturing Environment

When new students venture into music classrooms for the first time, they are filled with excitement and fear — they are excited to try something new and fearful of not being successful. How do we capture their youthful enthusiasm and allay their fears? By creating an environment that nurtures curiosity and creativity.

For example, when a “wrong” note is played, you need to figure out why it was played incorrectly and how you can help the student play the note as it was written. Do not put the student on the defensive by asking, “Why did or didn’t you do …?”

Instead, be positive and nurturing and say, “Let’s try X to see if we can improve Y.”

For the most part, young children exist in the present, and their lives are about movement and play. Movement is a part of everyday life, and those of us who have children know that static activity does not lend itself to play. Music programs live in the present, and music-making is definitely not a static activity.

Don’t Forget About Yourself

Whether you’ve been teaching for less than one year or more than 20 years, be sure to nurture yourself as well. Life coach and best-selling author Lauren Mackler defines seven ways to be nurturing to yourself.

  1. Send loving messages to yourself, which include giving yourself a pat on the back when deserved and being supportive of yourself as needed.
  2. Take good care of yourself.
  3. Do nice things for yourself.
  4. Set healthy boundaries with others.
  5. Become your own advocate.
  6. Believe in yourself.
  7. Be compassionate with yourself.

Music teachers know how influential and life-changing music can be. It helps us live more from the heart. We smile. We enjoy relationships. We are passionate and enlightened. We let go. We don’t suppress our emotions, and we express ourselves freely. In short, we view the world through the eyes of a child. And when we do that, we are already on the road to success.

This article originally appeared in the 2018 V2 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Genos MIDI Recording, Part 2

In Part 1 of this two-part series on MIDI recording in Genos, we focused on using Quick Recording mode, which is great for capturing ideas since Genos arms or activates every channel. This is especially useful when recording a Style, which can have up to eight tracks of instrumentation playing back at once.

This time we’ll dive deep into Multi Recording, which allows you to start from scratch and build a complete song track by track. For this demonstration, we’re going to be recording single part instrument voices (no layers or splits) and lay down a simple three-track song, one track at a time.

The first step is to select an instrument voice for your first track. Let’s choose one of my favorite voices in Genos: the Yamaha C7 Studio Grand, and assign it to the Right 1 Part. To do this, you can either touch the Right 1 graphic on the screen and select the C7 Studio Grand from page two of the Piano category, or press the Voice button (a white backlit button located to the right of the jog wheel, next to the Style button):

Screen views.
Someone pressing a touch screen.

Pressing the Voice button will take you to the Voice Part Setup screen. Tap anywhere within the Right 1 blue name field and you will be taken to the same category and voice selection screen as if you’d used the touch screen. This is cool because there’s more than one way to navigate the instrument voices:

Next, make sure that only the Right 1 Part is ON (unless of course you want to record layered or split voices, but for now let’s just stick with piano):

View of voice buttons.

Then double-check that the ACMP button is off (not lit):

View of buttons.

When the ACMP button is lit, generally you won’t hear a single instrument across the full range of the keyboard unless your fingering mode is set to one of the “FULL” keyboard modes. (See my blog article “Mastering AI Fingered mode” for more on this)

Now that you’re set up with your single C7 Studio Grand, let’s do some recording! It’s as simple as pressing the RECORDING button, located just to the right of the SONG B area on the left side of the panel:

Finger pressing recording button.

Once pressed, you will see the Song Recording menu pop up on the screen. Go ahead and touch Multi Recording. Next, press the red record icon in the lower left hand corner of the screen. You’ll now see all 16 tracks become “Armed” (in recording vernacular) — in other words, ready to record. It’s important to note that even in MIDI Multi Recording Mode, Genos still defaults to arming all 16 tracks, just to cover its bases. Also, be aware that the song name is always titled “New Song” (which makes sense, since we are going to do just that — record a new song):

Screen view.

Now let’s un-arm (more properly called “disarm”) the 15 tracks we don’t want to record. Simply deactivate tracks 2 through 16 by touching the red “Rec” icon beneath each track. You’ll notice that as you do this, each disarmed track number will turn green.

At this point you should have track 1 armed (indicated with a red Rec icon), and tracks 2 through 16 disarmed:

Screen view.

Genos is now in Record Standby mode, meaning that, when you strike a key, recording will begin.

NOTE: I highly recommend using a metronome when doing Multi Recording, as it can help you stay in time when laying down additional tracks. To turn on Genos’ built-in metronome, simply touch the Metronome icon in the upper right-hand portion of the screen. Changing the tempo or even tapping in a tempo in is achieved by the TEMPO + & – buttons as well as the TAP TEMPO button:

View of buttons.

Go ahead and start up the metronome and you’ll hear it begin clicking at the current tempo. (Turning the metronome on will not start the recording.) Once you’re comfortable with your chosen tempo, just start playing and Genos will begin recording. When you’re finished, touch Stop (the square icon at the bottom of the screen).

To play back what you’ve recorded, touch the Play/Pause icon at the bottom of the screen. If you’re not happy with your recording, simply touch the Record icon in the lower left-hand corner of the screen and try again. If you are happy with what you recorded, this is a good time to save your song.

To do so, simply touch the Save icon at the top of the screen:

Screen view.

Now you get to choose where you want to save your song — to the internal User memory, or to a USB Thumb Drive. (Note: A compatible USB thumb drive must be inserted into one of Genos’ “To Device” ports in order to save to a thumb drive.) Accordingly, select either the User icon or the USB1 icon and a name selection screen will appear, allowing you to name your song:

Screen shots.

Type the name of your new masterpiece into the character field, then press OK. At this point, you can confidently power down the Genos with the knowledge that your song has been saved.

Now it’s time to select another instrument voice for recording on Track 2. Go to the Home screen and touch the C7 Studio Grand icon, which is currently assigned to the Right 1 part. You will now see the Instrument categories. We’re going to be recording drums on Track 2, so touch the Drum Kit icon in the lower left-hand corner of the screen. Five pages of drum kits will appear. Select the first one, named Rock Drum Kit:

Screen shot.
Screen shot.

Press the Recording button and once again select Multi Recording mode, then touch the New Song field and select your song (I’ve named mine “Gabe’s Newest Hit”):

Next, touch the EXIT icon to return to the recording screen. Under Track 2 (Channel 2), there should be an icon of a Grand Piano. Touch that icon. The “Song Ch2” pop-up menu will appear:

Screen shot.

Select “Right 1” from the list (if it’s not already selected), then touch OK. You’ll now see that the Grand Piano icon for Track 2 has changed to a Drum Kit icon and is already in record stand-by mode, just waiting for you to lay down your second track:

Screen shot.

Turn the metronome back on, and when you’re ready to start recording, either start playing, or touch the Play/Pause icon at the bottom of the screen. When you’re finished laying down your drum track, touch the Stop icon at the bottom of the screen. Now touch the Play/Pause icon again and you’ll hear Tracks 1 and 2 playing back simultaneously.

Manually playing drums in time can be challenging, so Genos gives you the ability to quantize note data. Quantizing essentially moves notes you’ve recorded so they line up timing-wise with the beat.

Let’s go ahead and quantize the drums. You’ll notice an icon labeled “Quantize” at the bottom of the screen:

Screen shot.

Touch this and various Quantize options will appear to the right of the screen. For now, let’s stick with the default sixteenth note size with the strength at 100%. To apply this, select the Track/Channel you’d like to quantize (in this case, Track 2, Drums) and touch Execute. When you now play back your song, you should notice that the drum beat sounds tighter and more in time.

If you’re happy with what you’ve recorded on Track 2, go ahead and save again: Touch the Save icon at the top of the screen, select the current song you’re working on and touch the “Save Here” icon in the upper right-hand corner of the screen. You’ll be given an opportunity to rename the song or just leave it as is, then touch OK in the lower right hand corner of the screen. Genos will ask you if you’d like to overwrite your current song. Select “Yes” and you’ll be taken back to the recording screen.

Now it’s time to select our next instrument voice to record. If you scroll back up a little, you can simply follow the steps above. The process is exactly the same, although this time you will be recording to Track 3. Let’s select a Bass as the instrument voice for that track:

Screen shot.

After you’ve recorded your third track and saved it, now you can start mixing. Press the Slider Assign button just to the left of the faders until the OLED Sub Display appears (it’s the skinny window above the six knobs and eight faders), showing Ch1 through Ch10:

Front panel.

Faders 1, 2 and 3 now control the volume for Tracks 1, 2 and 3. Start your song playing back while moving the faders up and down. You’ll notice the volume levels of your three recorded tracks will get softer or louder. When you get the mix just the way you like it, simply save it again.

By repeating the steps above, you can record 16 individual MIDI tracks and mix them all independently, without ever cracking open a laptop. How cool is that!

All photographs courtesy of the author.

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha Genos.

Home Theater in Small Spaces

If you’ve ever wanted to have a great-sounding home theater or music streaming system in a small apartment or rented space but thought that it wasn’t possible, prepare to be surprised.

Sound bar on a cabinet below a flat screen tv.
Yamaha MusicCast BAR 400.

With a sound bar that includes a wireless subwoofer (such as the Yamaha MusicCast BAR 400) as your foundation, you can easily create and install a quality surround sound setup for movies, TV, gaming and streaming audio in even the smallest space, and without the need for a dedicated receiver or the hassle of running cables everywhere. (No need for drilling holes in walls or floors, either!)

Let’s take a closer look at the components of such a system:

Sound Bar

The key to creating a home theater in a small space is the sound bar, which reproduces the all-important center channel (where most dialog lives) as well as the left and right stereo channels, critical to music playback. As its name implies, the MusicCast BAR 400 utilizes MusicCast, the wireless multi-room audio system developed by Yamaha for easy connection through your home Wi-Fi® network. In addition, you can remotely control MusicCast devices from your smartphone or tablet using a simple app.

Photo of rear panel.
MusicCast BAR 400 rear panel connectors.

All you need is a single cable to connect the BAR 400 directly to your TV’s HDMI, optical or analog outputs. (For music-only content, you don’t need any cable at all since wireless connection can be made via Bluetooth®, AirPlay® or Spotify Connect.) You can even have hands-free operation of your system via Alexa voice control using any Amazon Echo device. And by adding a pair of optional Yamaha wireless MusicCast Surround-enabled speakers (see below), you can turn your system into a full 5.1 wall-shaking surround setup.

The BAR 400 provides great sound, with four 1-3/4″ woofers and dual 1″ tweeters for maximum sound coverage. It’s versatile too, with the ability to create simulated surround from DTS® Virtual:X™ soundtracks and decode Dolby® Digital and DTS® audio for full 5.1 surround sound (with the use of optional rear speakers). It can also play back virtually every audio file format from MP3 and MPEG-4 to AIFF up to 192 kHz/ 24-bit.

 Subwoofer

Photo of small rectangular subwoofer.
MusicCast BAR 400 subwoofer.

If you’re looking for realism, you need the bone-shaking low-end audio that can only come from a subwoofer. The subwoofer included with the MusicCast BAR 400 features a 6-1/2″ cone woofer that delivers bass frequencies with clarity and punch. And because it connects wirelessly via Bluetooth, you can place it anywhere in the room that’s convenient … without having to run a long cable.

Rear Surround Speakers

Every great home theater needs a great pair of rear surround speakers to hear those flyovers, effects and explosions. By adding a pair of Yamaha MusicCast 20 or MusicCast 50 wireless speakers, you can complete your 5.1 home theater (or create a multi-room audio setup) without having to run any wires around your couch, comfy chair or through the walls.

Two pairs of speakers.

Like the rest of the system, these small, unobtrusive speakers allow voice control via Alexa. They also feature a wide variety of connection choices including Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, AirPlay and Spotify Connect. Add a pair to the BAR 400 and you’ll have a full-blown 5.1 home theater system with left, center, right, left surround and right surround speakers, as well as a subwoofer.

Accessories

One of the huge advantages of building a home theater system around a MusicCast BAR 400 is that you don’t need a receiver or speaker wire — in fact, you don’t need any cabling at all, other than a single HDMI, optical or analog cable for connection to your TV. It’s a great way to turn any small space into the perfect binge-worthy home theater, powerful music system or booming game sound center.

 

Click here for more information about the Yamaha MusicCast BAR 400.

Snare Drum Rudiments

Rudiments are the “vocabulary” of percussionists and drummers. They teach stick control and help students develop their technique across all of the percussion instruments. In that sense, they are similar to scales on a keyboard instrument.

It is generally assumed that by the time a percussionist gets to college, they already know their rudiments. Unfortunately, many students don’t know them as well as they should. This is especially true if the student starts on a mallet percussion instrument or comes to percussion from another instrument.

A Brief History

Over the years, percussionists have tried to come up with a standardized list of rudiments. The original rudiments were developed in Europe hundreds of years ago and were introduced into the United States during the American Revolution. In 1933, the National Association of Rudimental Drummers (NARD) created the “Thirteen Essential Rudiments” from the 26 Standard American Drum Rudiments.

These thirteen rudiments were adopted and used as a test for membership in the so-called “Thirteen Club.” They included the long roll, the 5-stroke and 7-stroke roll, the flam, the flam accent, the flam paradiddle, the flamacue, the ruff, the single and double drag, the double paradiddle, and the single and triple ratamacue. In the early 1980s, the Percussive Arts Society (PAS) added fourteen rudiments, reordered them and published the 40 Standard American Drum Rudiments, broken down into the following four categories:

1) Roll Rudiments

2) Diddle Rudiments

3) Flam Rudiments

4) Drag Rudiments

More recently, a number of hybrid rudiments (combinations of two or more of the original 40 rudiments) have been informally added, and are common in drumlines and drum corps.

Favorites

Here are my two favorite rudimental warm-up exercises:

Musical annotation.

1) Flam Accents and Flam Taps:

Musical Annotation.

2) “Paradiddle-Paradiddle”:

Resources

Click here to download the Yamaha Rudiments Poster.

There are also numerous websites where you can explore snare drum rudiments, including:

Percussive Arts Society Rudiments

Vic Firth 40 Essential Rudiments

Drumeo Rudiment Drumming Game

 

 

Four Reasons I Travel With My Yamaha SILENT Guitar™

As a touring musician, I always look for a guitar that can work for me in all different situations — anything from playing live on a big stage to jamming in a small club to doing studio sessions. The SILENT Guitar™  from Yamaha, with its revolutionary design, more than fits the bill. Here are four reasons I take it with me wherever I go.

1. Portability: The SILENT Guitar has been with me all over the world, from Asia to the Middle East and Europe, and it’s never failed me. But it’s also extremely easy to travel with. That’s because you can actually unscrew the guitar’s body to make it even more portable! Since there’s also an option to plug your headphones straight into the guitar, it makes a great guitar to practice on, whether you’re travelling or when you simply need to dig down by yourself.

Several views of a Yamaha SILENT Guitar.

2. Sound: The built-in preamp on this guitar delivers great sound. I have played several gigs where people ask me where my pedals are and I tell them I don’t have any; it’s just me and the SILENT Guitar straight into the mixer! Plus, with its built-in effects, I know that no matter what PA system I encounter at a venue, I can always have my own settings to get the sound I need. Just plug and play!

3. Look: Audiences are always amazed at the look of the SILENT Guitar; its elegant and artistic design always draws eyes wherever I play. People can’t believe that, even though there is no body, they’re still hearing that full, beautiful warm sound coming through the speakers.

4. Quality/Reliability: A good quality instrument should allow you to focus on the main goal: to perform and express your inner feelings and thoughts out through the strings to the audience. I’ve played my Yamaha SILENT Guitar on tons of stages over an eight-year period and I’ve never had any serious problems with the electronics or structure of the instrument. I’ve been able to count on it throughout my career, and that’s why it will continue to be one of my main guitars for life!

Check out this video of Alex playing his SILENT Guitar:

Animated GIF courtesy of the author.

 

Click here for more information about the Yamaha SILENT Guitar.

Seven Fun Places to Put Your Wireless Turntable

The recent resurgence in popularity of vinyl records should really come as no surprise. Why? Because, as anyone who’s had the pleasure knows, playing records is fun: a visual, aural, and tactile experience like no other; an endearing ritual that can quickly become a habit; a way of listening to recorded music that feels direct, personal, and real. In today’s constantly connected iWorld, it’s refreshing to be able to hear songs in a manner that doesn’t involve disembodied icons and images floating on a screen.

And yet the new vinyl boom has also re-exposed one of the format’s key downsides: its lack of convenience, which is a tough hurdle to clear given that people are now used to accessing music wherever they go. The main problem is the turntable. Where do you put the darn thing? It’s big. It’s bulky. And it needs to be connected to both an amplifier and a preamp to be heard. So your placement options are sorely limited, right?

Wrong. Or, to be more specific, wrong if you have a wireless turntable such as the recently introduced Yamaha MusicCast VINYL 500, which has a built-in preamp and uses Wi-Fi® to send signals directly to powered MusicCast speakers and other wireless devices — no cables and no receiver necessary. The MusicCast VINYL 500 also allows you to tune into Internet radio and streaming services, and can even work with Alexa via your smartphone or Amazon Echo device.

All this means that you can now savor the joy of playing records anywhere in your home — and come that much closer to making your feng shui dreams a reality. Bearing in mind that a wireless turntable can be easily moved anywhere at any time, here are five places you might consider trying out:

1. Reading Nook

Imagine you’re relaxing at home on a weekend. You’re about to sit down with your favorite book in the reading area that you established for just such an occasion. But before you settle in, you realize there’s one thing that would help make this leisure activity even better: music. You grab a vinyl record from your nearby collection and drop it onto your wireless turntable. If you have multiple wireless speakers in your house, you can even control which ones your music is streamed to, so others in the house who may not share your eclectic taste can enjoy themselves in peace and quiet.

2. Home Office

Since it already has a computer and speakers (perhaps even wireless ones), your home office can be the perfect place to house a turntable. You might also consider storing your vinyl there — something that can help create a personal space for yourself, close to the rest of the family but still separate.

3. Enclosed Patio

Do you like to entertain? Putting a wireless turntable on your patio adds an instant soundtrack. And thanks to the turntable’s connecting capabilities, you can link it to multiple other speakers in your home (or even out in your yard), which gives your guests an enjoyable listening experience no matter where they happen to be.

4. Bedroom

It’s been a rough day and you need to get your soul back in order by listening to one of your favorite albums before retiring for the night. Why not add to the relaxation by bringing the turntable right into your bedroom? You may find that making the transition from wakefulness to slumber is easier than ever. There are of course other, more romantic possibilities in this part of the house that might involve the playing of Barry White records … but you can probably figure those out for yourself.

5. Kitchen/Dining Room

Great music adds to the experience of both cooking and eating. So set your wireless turntable on a nearby sideboard, counter, or shelf — anywhere handy, as long as it’s not too close to the preparation or consumption of food and drink. (Messy accidents and turntables don’t mix!) For extra fun, match the music you’re listening to with the style of cuisine being served. Tex-Mex and Willie Nelson, anyone?

6. Game Room

Playing video or board games is fun but sometimes you need to play something else — like a record — to create some atmosphere. Consider placing the turntable and a wireless speaker in your game room to boost the ambience while you’re rolling the dice or shooting bad guys on your big screen TV.

7. Next to the Bar

Enjoy mixing drinks like a pro? Enhance the experience with music while you create the next great cocktail. The next time you make a Manhattan, put on some Frank Sinatra to help get you and your guests in the mood.

These are just a few options — and we haven’t even discussed the tantalizing concept of playing your records outdoors! But you get the idea: One of vinyl’s biggest historical limitations, the turntable’s lack of easy portability, is now definitely a thing of the past.

 

Click here for more information about the Yamaha MusicCast VINYL 500 turntable.

Long May You Run

Whatever they say about exercise releasing endorphins, it’s all true. Moving one’s body has blissful and liberating benefits that will help you up your game. Whatever that game is.

Substitute the cardio of your choice, but for me, it’s running. Whenever I run (not coincidentally the title of a song I wrote with Keith Urban), whatever was holding me back minutes before no longer has any power over me. I’m a racehorse at the starting gate. Chomping at the bit. And when that gate opens, I’m transformed.

When I run, my blood sends all those juices to my brain. Creativity unleashed! The gap is closed on that lyric that was impossible to take full circle when I woke up in the morning, and now I know exactly how to approach it. Its story unravels before me in slow motion as if it were on a screen and I was watching a movie I directed.

Ten minutes ago I was invisible; now I’m Superwoman. I’m at pace with my drummer, nobody else’s. I’m able to fill all those half-empty glasses in my head — the ones that have left me so thirsty. They overflow with detail and tangents and color and possibility and positivity. Whatever pains me, heals me. I get stronger. And if I need to forget a certain something or somebody, it’s not as hard to do — at least for the rest of the day.

Why didn’t I feel this way before breakfast? Am I the same person?

Shelly Peiken selfie photo with a lake as background.

I notice a F6 chord in the song I’m listening to. What a lovely alternative to an otherwise generic 1-3-5 triad! Its nuance takes me to a slightly more nostalgic place — a welcome diversion from the ordinary. It’s the lime in my gin and tonic. The garnish on my dessert. I’ve always loved a good 6 chord. Why don’t I implement them more often? Have I been playing it too safe? Would I be asking myself these questions if my body were not in motion?

Running is my drug. It’s my fuel. It makes me fierce. Confident. I stop worrying about what anyone else thinks or says about me. I stop chasing that last hit and ask myself how my heart feels. What’s that Oscar Wilde saying? Be yourself; everyone else is taken. I believe this more than ever whenever I run.

I may wake up tomorrow and feel blocked, defeated, deflated, downtrodden, overwhelmed. But I know that I can get back on track and in the middle of my first mile, I will be revived. I will remember who I am.

Is it all in my mind? Perhaps. But that’s all that matters.

Free your mind. The rest will follow.

 

Check out Shelly’s other postings.

How to Fight Feedback, Part 2

In Part 1 of this series we talked about how speaker placement, microphone pickup patterns, and mic technique can help reduce feedback. This time we’ll discuss how you can use EQ to help in the never-ending battle against squawks and squeals!

Let’s assume that you’ve followed all the suggestions we gave in Part 1, but are still having some feedback issues. Maybe your PA is “ringing” a little bit at times, or perhaps when you raise the volume you get a howling sound. That’s where equalization comes in handy. Let’s look first at how to use EQ to reduce feedback in the house speakers, and then we’ll explore how it can help with stage monitors.

High Pass Filtering

As Scotty once said to Kirk on Star Trek, “Captain, I cannot change the laws of physics.” One of the immutable laws of physics when it comes to sound is that low frequencies tend to spread out in all directions. Couple that with the fact that vocals usually need to be the loudest thing in the PA, and you have a situation that could promote feedback in the low- or low-midrange frequencies even when you carefully place speakers using the guidelines described in Part 1.

A great way to combat this is to apply a high-pass filter (HPF) to vocal channels. By rolling off low frequencies (while allowing higher ones to pass, hence the name), this kind of filter helps eliminate rumble and handling noise from the microphone … while at the same time reducing the chances of low-frequency feedback.

Some mixers — such as the Yamaha MG Series and TF Series — provide an HPF on each channel, making this easy to do. If the frequency of the HPF is adjustable (as it is in TF Series mixers), you have even more control. Have the singer speak or sing into the microphone while you listen to it over the main PA speakers. Turn on the HPF and slowly raise the frequency. Listen to how the voice changes. Depending upon the singer’s voice you may not hear a change until the roll-off frequency is set as high as 200 Hz or so. When you hear the voice start to thin out, move the frequency down to restore the lows. You may be surprised to learn how high you can set the filter before you hear it working.

Graphic.
Yamaha TF Series HPF screen.

But you’re not done yet! With the singer continuing to speak or sing into the microphone, slowly raise the main volume of the PA system. When you begin to hear a low or low-mid howl, back off the volume until the feedback stops. Now it’s time to “ring out” your PA, using something called a graphic equalizer.

Using a Graphic Equalizer To Fight Feedback

This kind of equalizer provides anywhere from 5 to 31 “bands” of frequencies that you can boost or cut. Those frequencies are usually fixed, meaning that you can’t change them. Each has an associated slider (hardware or software) for boost or cut, and after you’ve made your adjustments, these sliders present a graphic picture of the overall frequency response (thus the name). The good news is that you can choose from a lot of frequencies; the bad news is that sometimes you may need to get to a frequency that falls between the ones provided.

A graphic EQ can be an outboard hardware device or it can be software such as the 9-band digital version provided by the Yamaha EMX Series of powered mixers.

Here’s what a typical 15-band graphic equalizer looks like:

Graphic.
A typical 15-band graphic EQ.

And here’s a screenshot of the 9-band digital graphic equalizer built into the Yamaha EMX 5016CF powered mixer:

Graphic.
Yamaha EMX graphic EQ.

How To Ring Out a PA

Start with all of the sliders at 0 or “flat.” Have a helper speak into the microphone while you slowly raise the volume of the microphone in the PA system. When you begin to hear feedback or a ringing sound, stop. Look at the graphic EQ and make a guess at which one frequency you think is ringing. Typical suspects are 400 Hz, 630 Hz, 1.6 kHz and 4 kHz. Don’t be scared if you’re not sure; you’ll get good at this with practice. Slowly raise the slider for that frequency and listen. When you’ve found the correct frequency, raising the slider a few dB will cause the ringing to get worse. If nothing happens, bring the slider back to “0.” Try another frequency. The key is to move only one slider at a time, and move the slider slowly so that you don’t create any loud squeals or howls.

Now that you’ve found the problem frequency, use the slider to cut it by a few dB. You can then make the microphone a bit louder and try it again. You may find that a different frequency starts to ring. Repeat the process until you can get the speakers louder than you think you’ll need, then lower the volume using the fader on the input channel. This is not a perfect process and you’ll reach a point of diminishing returns where the volume of the PA is just too loud to avoid feedback — but hopefully that level will be far louder than you need. Best of all, ringing out a PA allows you to achieve “maximum gain before feedback” — meaning that you’ll be able to make the speakers louder without feedback than you could before ringing them out.

Automatic Feedback Suppression

If you’re not comfortable ringing out the PA manually, you can use the Automatic Feedback Suppression feature that’s built into some mixers, such as the Yamaha EMX Series models. A Feedback Suppressor analyzes the stereo L/R mix, detects ringing frequencies and automatically applies notch filters to eliminate the feedback. These are filters with a very narrow bandwidth. Their purpose is to pull out a small “slice” of frequencies without changing the entire overall sound:

Graphic.
A notch filter.

How To Ring Out Onstage Monitors

The process for ringing out monitors is the same as for ringing out the PA, but you’ll need to apply a graphic EQ to the Aux Output that feeds the stage monitor — a feature provided by Yamaha TF Series mixers:

Graphic.
Yamaha TF Series graphic EQ.

Using a Parametric Equalizer To Fight Feedback

A parametric equalizer is an even finer tool for locating a ringing frequency. The advantage of a parametric EQ is that, unlike a graphic EQ, you can choose the frequency to be cut or boosted. Using a parametric EQ is a bit more difficult than using a graphic EQ but the idea is the same: Make your best guess as to the ringing frequency, then slowly raise the gain until you hear the ringing. If you don’t hear ringing, slowly sweep the frequency from low to high. When you hear the ringing, stop.

One word of caution: the default (starting) setting for the width of each parametric band (usually referred to as the band’s “Q”) is often fairly wide, and may look something like this:

Graphic.
Parametric EQ, wide bandwidth.

So after locating the offending frequency, you should use the bandwidth (“Q”) control to make the bandwidth narrower, as shown in the illustration below. That way, you can better zero in on the feedback frequency while changing the sound of the vocal as little as possible.

Graphic.
Parametric EQ, narrow bandwidth.

Once narrowed, again slowly sweep the frequency back and forth just a little bit to see if the ringing gets worse. Once you’ve identified the frequency that’s causing the ringing or feedback, cut it by 5 or 6 dB, as shown below. This is similar to using a notch filter, but the difference is that you’re able to choose the specific frequency you want to attenuate.

Graphic.
A narrow cut on a parametric equalizer, similar to using a notch filter.

At this point you should be able to make the PA and/or stage monitors louder without any ringing. Yamaha TF Series mixers even allow remote control using an iPad. This allows you to ring out monitors while you are standing on the stage in front of them, which really speeds up the process.

The idea of ringing out speakers can be a little daunting at first but over time you’ll get faster at finding the frequencies and correcting them. Just remember to work slowly!

 

Check out our other Tools of the Trade postings.

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha PA speakers and stage monitors.

Tips for Purchasing a Concert Snare Drum

The snare drum is the central instrument in the percussion section — important in both concert band and orchestral literature. Here’s what you need to know when picking the next snare drum for your school’s music program.

Metal vs. Wood Shell

The shell of a snare drum can be made out of an assortment of materials, though it’s usually metal or wood. Metal shells can be made out of steel, aluminum or copper. Wooden shells can be made of maple, birch, mahogany and/or a variety and combination of other woods. With all these choices, it’s important to know the sonic characteristics of the two:

Metal shell characteristics

  • Bright, sharp tone
  • Fast attack
  • Long sustain

Wood shell characteristics

  • Warm, dark tone
  • Round attack
  • Maximum resonance
Two snare drums.

Snare Material

The snare drum gets its name from the material that is stretched across the snare (bottom) head to produce a buzzing sound. Snares can be made from wire, cable, gut or other synthetic materials. The two most common types of snares are coils and cables.

Coiled snare wire characteristics

  • Bright sound
  • Long sustain (this makes it easier for smooth sounding rolls)
  • Quick response at soft dynamics

Cable snare wire characteristics

  • Warm, dark sound
  • Short sustain
  • Fuller sound at loud dynamics
Side by side images of a coiled snare vs a cabled snare.

Which Drum is Best for My Ensemble?

Unfortunately, there is no one “correct” answer when it comes to picking out a snare drum. Drums with metal shells are generally less expensive than those with wooden shells, and metal drums usually have coiled snares while wooden drums have cable snares. Traditionally, metal shell snares have been used with wind ensembles and wood shell ones with symphony orchestras. In fact, any drum will work with any ensemble, though it’s good to have a selection of snare drums to use on different pieces. In addition, you can always switch the snares (or drum heads) to change the sound of the drum.

And here’s a tip that can make your purchase decision easier: When you attend a concert and you hear a snare drum you like, find out what drum the percussionists are using. That will always point you in a good direction!

Check out this video about Yamaha concert snare drums:

Click here for more information about the full line of Yamaha concert snare drums.

Electronic Drums 101

If you’re a first-time shopper — or even if you’ve been playing acoustic drums for years — buying an electronic drum kit can seem like a daunting task. But with all of the advances in technology and the multitude of options available today, now is a great time to jump into that arena.

In addition, parts of an electronic kit can be incorporated into an acoustic kit to create a hybrid kit, giving you the best of both worlds. Parents of budding drummers should also bear in mind that a starter electronic drum kit will allow your son or daughter to practice quietly, and then down the road move on to an acoustic drum kit as their skills develop.

In this article, we’ll take a close look at the components of a standard electronic drum kit and talk about the features you should look for when making your shopping choices.

Components

As shown in the illustration below, a typical five-piece kit will include a snare pad, three tom pads and a kick pad, plus two or three cymbal pads and a hi-hat pad. The hardware will typically include a drum rack (with module, snare, tom and cymbal mounts) and the sound module itself.

Electronic drum kit.
Yamaha DTX6K-X electronic drum kit showing various components.

Sometimes pedals are included too — for example, the Yamaha DTX402 electronic drum kit comes with two of them. All you’ll then need to round things off is a throne (a drum seat) and a high quality set of headphones or a drum amp to hear yourself.

Let’s take a closer look at the main electronic drum features you should look for:

Features

Snare drum and tom pad surfaces will typically be made from a combination of plastic, rubber, mesh or TCS (textured cellular silicone); the latter is used by the Yamaha DTX-PAD. Each surface will have its own feel and degree of acoustic sound (yes, even pads make some acoustic noise, and this can be a factor if you require significant sound isolation), with sizes ranging from 6″ to 14″.

Here’s a video showing the differences between a standard rubber pad and the Yamaha DTX-PAD:

Cymbal pad surfaces will generally be made of plastic, acrylic, metal or rubber. Like drum pads, each cymbal pad surface will have its own feel. Typical sizes range from 10″ to 15″.

Kick drum pad surfaces are usually made of rubber or mesh, but there are also beater-less kick pedals. These operate without striking a pad, and work great for those who have noise restrictions, but if you want the feel of playing on an acoustic bass drum, choose a pad that allows you to use a real bass drum pedal; some will even let you attach a double bass pedal.

Trigger Zones

This refers to the number of areas on a pad that can trigger separate sounds. A one-zone pad can only be used to play a single sound, while a two-zone pad can trigger two separate sounds. Yamaha even makes three-zone pads that can be used to play three separate sounds; the XP80 DTX-PAD also supports open rimshots and closed rimshots, plus you can assign different voices to different zones. This makes highly original performances possible. For example, you can create an acoustic drum sound when you hit the head area, a cowbell sound when you hit the open rim area, and a loop sound when you hit the closed rim area.

Mounting Hardware

Your options here are to use either a drum rack or standard acoustic drum hardware. Whichever you choose, you want to make sure to select hardware that is durable and dependable so you get the most use without having parts break down.

Racks are great if you’re not likely to be moving your drum kit from one location to another very often. However, if you are planning on using your electronic drum kit on gigs, you might want to think about using acoustic drum hardware instead, since it will make it much easier to pack up and transport your rig.

Drum rack on left; acoustic drum hardware on right.
Sound Module

This is the heart of every electronic drum kit. It’s where you plug in your pads or triggers, adjust the trigger parameters, choose which sounds are assigned to each pad and set up collections of sounds (typically called “drum kits”) so you can make fast adjustments from song to song — or even within a song. The outputs of the module are connected to a drum amp, your band’s sound system or your trusty headphones or earphones so you (and your audience) can hear your playing.

Most modules offer the following features:

1. A built-in metronome
2. Recorded songs that you can play along to
3. An auxiliary input for hooking up an audio player so you can play along to your favorite songs
4. Training exercises designed to make you a better player

Many electronic drum manufacturers also offer apps that allow you to control the module from your own smart device. Using these kinds of apps makes operation of the module easy and intuitive, while at the same time adding more features. There are numerous Yamaha apps, for example, that allow you to make custom kits, edit sounds, play along to songs in your smart device, set up the metronome, do firmware upgrades right to your module and adjust the triggering parameters for your playing style … all with just a simple swipe.

Additional Features

Like acoustic drum kits, electronic drum kits come in many models. As you move higher up in price, the number of features also generally increases.

View of advanced drum kit from above.
An advanced electronic drum kit.

Here are some upgraded features to look for:

1. More drum and cymbal pads
2. Larger size drum and cymbal pads
3. Upgraded hardware

In addition, many advanced sound modules will offer additional features such as:

1. More individual sounds
2. Higher quality sounds including samples of real acoustic drums
3. More inputs for adding tom or cymbal pads
4. Individual audio outputs instead of just the standard stereo outputs
5. Sample import so you can load in your own sounds

Above all, you want to purchase a kit that is durable, dependable, and will last you for years. Remember: This is a product that will be beat on and used a lot, so make sure you choose a good quality kit the first time. Taking this approach will definitely save you money in the long run!

Photographs courtesy of the author and Kunhardt Photography.

Click here for more information about Yamaha electronic drum kits.

 

Bringing Bluetooth® to the Stage

Anyone who has set up a PA system for a performance, presentation or party knows just how complicated it can be. You’ve got heavy speakers and amplifiers, confusing cables, a mixing board, effects boxes, and of course the cases and bags for it all. Then you have to figure out how to plug in all the wires, instruments, microphones and music sources. However, with the new Yamaha STAGEPAS 400BT and 600BT, life just got a lot easier.

These systems are simplicity itself. Each consists of two lightweight speakers, a pair of color coded speaker cables, a power cable, and a detachable mixer (with onboard effects) that fits neatly into the back of one of the speakers — and that’s it! With so few pieces to set up, you can have a powerful PA up and running within just a few minutes, quickly turning any space into a stage.

Yamaha PA system.
STAGEPAS 400BT components.

It’s easy enough to plug in guitars, amps, keyboards and microphones, but it’s wireless Bluetooth connectivity that makes the 400BT and 600BT truly special. For anybody who has had the unpleasant experience of trying to connect a smartphone or tablet to a mixer using complicated and confusing cabling, this is a dream come true. Instead of figuring out what wires you need, all you have to do is pair your device via Bluetooth and you’ve got instant audio streaming of backing tracks, break music, loops, even software instruments — all from up to 33 feet away, allowing you to place the device where it is most accessible and/or safest.

A single Bluetooth button/LED is used for easy pairing and also switches Bluetooth connectivity on or off. When the LED is off, Bluetooth is off; when lit steadily, it’s on. When flashing slowly, it’s waiting for a Bluetooth connection; when flashing fast, the STAGEPAS is paired with your device.

There are plenty of input channels, power and connection options on both models to cover most small- or medium-sized venue music or public speaking needs. The 600BT offers 680 watts of power and 10 mixer channels, including four mic inputs (two with phantom power); each of its speakers provide a 10″ woofer and a 1-1/4″ tweeter. The 400BT features 400 watts of power and eight mixer channels, again including four mic inputs, two with phantom power; each speaker is outfitted with an 8″ woofer and a 1″ tweeter. Each system also allows you to connect one or two onstage powered monitors such as a Yamaha DBR Series. If you need additional low end, you can also connect a powered subwoofer such as a Yamaha DXS Series to the dedicated Subwoofer Output jack. A Master Level control lets you determine the volume of the L/R speakers with a single knob, and there’s an equivalent Monitor Out control for the speaker(s) connected to the Monitor outputs.

Two pieces of PA equipment.

For tonal adjustments, there’s an independent two- or three-band equalizer on each channel, with up to 15dB of boost or cut. (The 600BT offers High, Mid and Low bands, while the 400BT provides High and Low bands.) There’s also a simple one-knob Master EQ, which you can use to tailor the system for optimum Speech, Music or Bass Boost usage. Another welcome feature is feedback suppression, which helps target and reduce frequencies that might cause feedback before they can be heard (and before they cause the audience to go running for the exits!).

Need effects? The STAGEPAS 400BT and 600BT have you covered. An onboard professional quality SPX digital reverb (based on the famed standalone Yamaha SPX effects processors) gives you the option to choose from Hall, Plate, Room or Echo. Reverb can be added individually to channels 1 – 4 (at whatever amounts you desire), plus turning the Type/Time control to the right lengthens the time of the selected type. You can also use a footswitch to turn off all reverb — very useful when MC’ing a live event since it allows you to sing with reverb and talk between songs without it.

But it’s the small details that make these systems so flexible. For example, various inputs that accept stereo phone (1/4″), stereo-mini (1/8″) and/or RCA jacks. Or ST/MONO switches that allow you to assign the L and R signals to the equivalent left and right speaker outputs (when set to STEREO), or to mix them to both the left and right speakers (when set to MONO). In addition, a Hi-Z switch on channel 4 enables you to connect an instrument such as electric guitar, bass or keyboard directly without the need for a DI box — one less accessory to have to carry to your event and hook up.

With STAGEPAS BT, you can set up a fully functioning Bluetooth-capable PA system in no time at all. Lightweight, portable and powerful, these systems are ready to make your events shine!

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha STAGEPAS BT systems.

How to Get Funds from ESSA’s Title IV-A Grant Program

Updated 6/22/2020  

Every year, I have the privilege of attending the National Association of Music Merchants (NAMM) Music Education Advocacy Fly-in in Washington, D.C.

The goal of this program is to train NAMM members about the policies and priorities of the current administration so when we meet with our members of Congress, we can better advocate for the importance of music education.

This year, we were unable to attend in person because of COVID-19, but we received training through the NAMM Advocacy Summit and are now equipped to accomplish the same goals virtually.

I always learn so much in a few short days at the fly-ins. In recent years, one of the most helpful and talked-about topics has been how to access Every Student Succeeds Act (ESSA) funds, and this is what I want to pass along to music educators who do so much with so little.

ESSA Background

When ESSA passed with bipartisan support in December 2015, music educators around the country stood and applauded. The act not only called out “music” and “the arts” in its definition of a “well-rounded education,” but it also allocated resources to provide that well-rounded education.

Under ESSA, the highest poverty schools benefit the most from Title I funds. For FY2020$1.21 billion was appropriated through ESSA’s Title IV-A flexible block grant program known as Student Support and Academic Enrichment Grants (SSAE). That’s a lot of money, but accessing it requires a little effort.

Ask and Keep Asking

The most important thing to remember is that the Title IV-A (SSAE) grant program is an ANNUAL source of federal funding to states — and subsequently, to districts — which is why it is vital to keep asking every year for funds to help serve more students. Start with your principal, arts administrator or the specialist charged with applying for federal funds. Ask them if your school/district has submitted grant applications to your state to receive these SSAE resources.

If SSAE funds have been applied for — and potentially already received — in past years, ask how to leverage these resources to meet the needs of your music program so that it may be expanded to provide equal access to all students, which is another ESSA tenet. For updated information on the funding process itself, check out this infographic from the Title IV-A Coalition.

Perform a Needs Assessment

Next, perform a needs assessment. If you’re not sure how to do this or where to start, the National Association for Music Education (NAfME) can help. Its Opportunity to Learn Standards (OTLs) document specifies the resources your school should provide to give students a “meaningful chance to achieve at the levels spelled out in the Core Music Standards.”

Many programs in a variety of states have benefitted from this resource. The NAMM Foundation recently revealed that 277 school districts reported using Title IV, Part A (SSAE) funds during the 2019-2020 school year for music education.

Start With a Simple Search

Most school administrators now know about ESSA’s Title IV-A SSAE grants, but they may not realize that these funds can be used for music programs. Start by searching “Title IV-A in (insert your state).” This should take you to your state’s Department of Education (DoE) landing page that provides a vast amount of information regarding the use of these funds. You are looking to discover how SSAE funds are allocated to support well-rounded education opportunities.

As an example, I searched for “Title IV-A in Colorado” and was taken to the CDE Title IV-A landing page, which provides a “Use of Funds” section that lists, among other offerings, music and arts programs as eligible activities “to support well-rounded educational opportunities for students.”

Next, contact the person at your state DoE whose is responsible for education in the arts. Because these are federal (i.e., public) funds, you should be able to find information on which districts/schools have been awarded these grants in the past and for which programs. Check the State Education Agency Directors of Arts Education (SEADAE) roster to find your state’s arts representative and his/her contact information. Simply reach out to your state’s SEADAE representative and ask how you might be able to view the list of SSAE grantees from past years. If you find that music programs in your state have benefitted from these grants, contact that school to determine how the funds were used. If there are no music programs indicated, take your plan to your supervising administrator and go from there.

Finally, be sure that your plan addresses the intended purpose of the Title IV-A (SSAE) grant program. In Colorado, the purpose is stated on the DoE landing page as follows:

“Title IV, Part A of the Every Student Succeeds Act of 2015 is intended to improve students’ academic achievement by increasing the capacity of States, local educational agencies (LEAs), schools, and local communities to provide all students with access to a well-rounded education, improve school conditions for student learning, and improve the use of technology in order to improve the academic achievement and digital literacy of all students.”

Many music educators believe that applying for a grant is a complicated procedure but it starts by simply asking questions to learn how federal funds are applied for and allocated in your own district. In some states, the application that districts use to apply for these funds from the state is a one-page document. Don’t let the process scare you (or your principal) away from providing more students with access to a well-rounded education through music.

Change Lives

Those of us who continue to attend the NAMM Fly-in do so because we know that becoming a more informed advocate translates into serving increased numbers of students with life-changing experiences. Title IV-A (SSAE) provides that opportunity. Music educators just need to take that first step.

Resources

Yamaha is an active advocate for music education, and we want to empower music educators to strengthen their programs in any way we can. Please register for the Yamaha Educator newsletter to read up on advocacy, professional development, information about instruments, resources, partnerships in education and more. Join the Yamaha Music Educator Community on Facebook or email us at educators@yamaha.com.

The Art of Arranging

September: The last rays of summer, the first blush of fall … and, for many of us (or our kids), back to school.

This time of year I often find myself reflecting on my own school days. I wish I could say that I had many influential music teachers who shaped the course of my life, but the truth of the matter is that the state of public education in Brooklyn, where I was raised, was woefully inadequate in that area, at least in the years that I was a cog in the system. I did have one pretty cool professor at the university I attended — a gentleman and scholar by the name of Peter Winkler, who actually viewed popular music as worthy of study, in stark contrast to most of his rather snobbish peers, for whom classical was the only music to be taken seriously.

Fortunately, I think most people had a better scholastic experience. I know that Brian Wilson, the famed leader of the Beach Boys, did. In his 2016 book I Am Brian Wilson, he talks about a high school music teacher by the name of Fred Morgan, who actually failed the burgeoning young composer because Brian didn’t know how to write classical music. Despite that, writes Wilson, “He got me thinking about some of the different ways music can work. … He taught us that music was a contrast, pale parts versus emotional parts, and that not all the instruments in a song had to go in the same direction.”

What Brian’s teacher was talking about, of course, was arrangement — the art of bringing variety to a melody, and an integral part of what makes a piece of music special.

The classical world has offered brilliant arrangements and orchestrations for centuries. From Beethoven’s Ninth Symphony to Ravel’s Bolero to Stravinsky’s Firebird Suite to Gershwin’s Rhapsody in Blue, composers have found imaginative ways to utilize and blend the tonalities of traditional instruments — and sometimes non-traditional ones too (think Tchaikovsky’s 1812 Overture, with its climactic volley of cannon fire). The same can be said of the jazz and big band arrangements of Duke Ellington, Billy Strayhorn, Glenn Miller, Count Basie, Nelson Riddle, Quincy Jones and others.

But it can be argued that until Sir George Martin brought his classical training to the melodies of The Beatles, arrangement usually played only a very minor role in pop music. Songs written in that genre tend to be played by very small ensembles consisting of guitar, keyboard, bass and drums, sometimes augmented by a saxophone and/or small horn section. (The exception, of course, being Phil Spector productions!) Sure, most pop and rock records start off soft and end loud, with dynamic and tonal contrasts between verses and choruses, as well as layers of instruments and vocal harmonies being added as the song goes on — but that’s about it in terms of arrangement. Martin brought a deft touch and enhanced instrumentation (much of it symphonic) to many of the Beatles recordings — particularly later ones, like “Hey Jude and “Something” — that gave pop music a new degree of sophistication and made it more interesting to the ear. Since then, modern-day producers such as Max Martin, Mark Ronson and Paul Epworth have taken up the mantle, bringing sonic diversity to contemporary hits.

Brian Wilson playing a grand piano.
             Brian Wilson … then and now.

Brian Wilson — who, despite failing music in high school, went on to become one of the most significant composers of the 20th century — became a master arranger too. Nowhere is this more evident than on the 1966 Beach Boys Pet Sounds album, which features Brian’s spectacular arrangement of the traditional folk song “Sloop John B” (incredibly, created in just one night, yet so much more intricate than the rather pedestrian Kingston Trio version he based it on). It’s also an album that boasts a ton of “ear candy” courtesy of esoteric percussion instruments such as sleigh bells, timpani, güiro, vibraphone and bongos … supplemented at times by empty soda cans and water bottles.

Even before Pet Sounds, Wilson had taken the art of arrangement to a whole new level by using the human voice as a primary instrument. As his brother (and fellow Beach Boy) Carl once explained, “Our vocals were voiced like horn parts, the way R&B records make background vocals sound like a sax section. It sounded big, because the four parts were all within the same octave; that was really the secret. [Brian] used a lot of counterpoint, a lot of layered sound; it had a real depth to it. We didn’t just duplicate parts; we didn’t just sing octaves; that would sound really lame.”

There are many examples of genius in Brian Wilson’s vocal arranging skills. Check out the stunning a cappella breakdown in “Sloop,” or in the lesser-known “Heroes and Villains,” or the round that concludes “God Only Knows.” You’ll hear a depth of complexity cloaked in an illusion of simplicity — much the same way virtuoso instrumentalists make everything they play look easy.

So next time you listen to a piece of music, try to focus on all the embellishments and underpinnings swirling around the central melody instead of just the melody itself. You may be surprised at just how much is going on beneath the surface!

Photo courtesy of Beachwood Entertainment Collective

 

Check out Howard’s other postings.

Choosing the Right Bass Guitar, Part 2: Active vs. Passive

Perfection is in the eye of the beholder, and perhaps nowhere more so than when defining the perfect bass guitar. As we discussed in Part 1 of this article, some players prefer four strings on their instrument, while others want five (or more). Some say long scale, others say short scale. Solid body or hollow body, bolt-on neck or neck-through, fretted or fretless … the list of differentiating and distinguishing features, qualities, characteristics, specifications, materials, designs and components goes on and on.

Yet whatever your preferences, there always seems to be just enough logic to keep the argument festering. And so, in that spirit, let’s focus here on one of the trickier decisions you can make about a bass guitar: Active or passive?

An active bass is an instrument equipped with an onboard, internally-mounted, battery-powered preamp (usually nine volts but sometimes 18 volts) that boosts and equalizes the pickup’s signal before it arrives at the output jack. In some cases, an active bass will even be equipped with pickups that require power. In contrast, a passive bass has none of the above … and to confuse things even further, some basses are switchable between active and passive modes.

So which should you choose?

On the surface, the debate between active versus passive may appear to be between new-fangled complexity and tried-and-true simplicity. But as you may have already guessed, it’s far more complicated than that. So without further ado, let’s explore the pros and cons of each:

Active: The Pros

Bassists often use adjectives like “snappy,” “sparkly” or “sizzling” to describe the sound of an active bass. These descriptions are likely attributable to the fact that active basses enable you to shape your tone much more than a comparable passive bass.

A bass guitar.
Yamaha BB734A.

The tone controls on a passive bass can only cut frequencies, but the tone controls on an active bass allow you to boost frequencies too, giving you much more flexibility. This can be especially helpful if you play in a cover band where you need to wander across a diverse tonal landscape during a set, or if you want to dial in a specific signature sound for a specific genre like slap or grind metal. Many active basses have three- or even four-band EQs, letting you select specific frequencies to sculpt your bass sound before your signal even gets to your amp. Several Yamaha basses are equipped with three-band EQ and active/passive electronics, including the BB700 Series and the TRBX600 Series.

In addition to greater tonal control, active basses introduce far less noise and interference than passive basses, as well as delivering a stronger signal with less degradation than their passive counterparts. This gives your amp a cleaner, much hotter signal to work with. Bear in mind, however, that you can always roll off the volume slightly on an active bass to reduce some of the hi-fi qualities for a more “passive” sound.

Active: The Cons

To the ears of those who prefer passive basses, active basses aren’t very dynamic sounding. Sure, their signal is hot and consistent, but it can sound compressed. In addition, putting all of that frequency boosting control in the wrong hands can lead to a painful amount of ear-splitting hiss if treble frequencies get cranked too aggressively.

Also, if you’re the practical type, you also need to be fully aware that when the battery in your active bass dies, your sound will die with it … unless, of course, you have a bass that’s active/passive switchable. Changing out a dead battery for a new one on an active bass with a hinged battery compartment isn’t a big deal in theory, but only if you’re prepared with a fresh battery. If you don’t have a fresh battery on hand, or if your bass’ battery compartment is accessible behind screws, it’s a huge deal … especially if you’re on stage, in the middle of a set. It’s like getting a flat tire in your car and realizing that the spare is in the garage or doesn’t have air in it. And on the same note, players who habitually leave their instrument cable plugged in should be aware of this painful fact: If you do that with an active bass you’ll be draining and replacing batteries faster than you can say “a pack of fresh 9-volts, please.”

Passive: The Pros

A bass guitar.
Yamaha RBX170EW.

Bassists often use adjectives like “earthy,” “warm,” “full,” “punchy” or “round” to describe the sound of a passive bass. That’s likely because passive basses rely on less circuitry than their active counterparts, and so they deliver a sound that’s more pure, and more sensitive to “touch” from a player capable of finessing real dynamics out of their instrument. Yamaha offers a wide array of passive basses, including the RBX Series and most of the BB Series.

The tone controls on a passive bass are much simpler than those found on active basses. No micro-switches or tiny pots inside the control cavity to tweak, no hissy highs or blossoming bottoms to contend with. Just straightforward tone and volume controls that are wide open when rotated to the right, and cut frequencies or volume when rolled off to the left. This leaves you with a more dynamic attack that doesn’t have to fight against the compression inherent in many active bass circuits.

Playing a passive bass means not ever worrying about what can go wrong with onboard active electronics. Sure, something can go wrong with any bass, but there are less connections, components, and overall circuitry that can develop issues — no batteries that can run out of power in the middle of a set or session, no circuit boards that can work loose, and fewer wires to become unsoldered. And while you may not have the steroidal tone shaping of an active bass at your fingertips, you can always get the extra oomph from any decent quality bass amp — its tone shaping capabilities should at least be comparable to that of an active bass.

Passive: The Cons

There’s no getting around the fact that the signal coming from a passive bass is not as strong as on an active bass. That doesn’t matter if the pickup on that bass is delivering a sufficiently “hot” signal, but if it’s actually weak, that’s a bonafide problem, especially if you use long cables and don’t have the best amp in the world. In such instances, you might actually introduce noise and RF interference from nearby computer monitors and fluorescent lighting. In addition, compensating for weak output often requires you to rely on your amp’s gain, and doing so may mean introducing undesirable but very audible noise from the amp’s circuitry.

Clearly there are upsides and downsides on both sides of this debate, but if you want the best of both worlds you can always consider a bass that comes equipped with an active/passive switch to change how the signal courses through your bass’ electronics. When it’s in active mode, you get the hotter signal and monstrous tonal shaping capabilities. And when it’s passive, you get the dynamic control and safety net in case your battery gives up the ghost.

One last note: Regardless of whether you prefer active over passive or vice versa, remember that there are lots of other variables that will contribute to your sound. If you’re fortunate enough to find a bass that meets most, if not all, of your criteria, all of these nuances will become irrelevant as you get accustomed to your instrument, and everything but the music will eventually recede into the background.

Anatomy of a Snare Drum

Snare drums come in all shapes and sizes. They are used in concert and orchestral music, marching band, pop music and many other genres. The instrument is basically a short cylinder with a drumhead at each end. The top head is struck with sticks and the bottom head is fitted with snares that vibrate sympathetically, giving the snare drum its distinctive “snap.”

Below is an annotated illustration of a typical snare drum, followed by a description of each part. It’s always helpful to become familiar with the anatomy of any instrument you play, especially if there is something that needs to be repaired!

Snare drum image with annotations and arrows pointing out the specific parts/features.

Air Hole: Allows air to escape the cylinder when the batter head is struck.

Badge: The identification plate that is attached to the shell. Information that is found on the badge can include model number, serial number and manufacturer of drum.

Batter Head: The top head that is struck with sticks or brushes. This drumhead is thicker than the snare head (the head on the bottom) to withstand the repetitive playing from the drumsticks.

Butt Plate: This part secures the snares on the shell opposite from the strainer.

Counter Hoop: The rim or hoop that tightens the drumhead.

Lug Casing: This part receives the tension rod.

Shell: The body of the drum. Shells can be made out of wood, metal, aluminum, and other materials.

Snares: Wire, cable, gut or synthetic materials that are stretched across the bottom head to produce a buzzing sound.

Snare Head: The bottom head, also known as the resonant head, is thinner than the batter head (the head on the top). Snares are stretched over the snare head to allow them to vibrate when the batter head is played.

Snare Strainer: The mechanism that includes the snare strainer release and the snare strainer adjustment screw.

Snare Strainer Adjustment Screw: The screw that tightens or loosens the snares.

Snare Strainer Release: The lever mechanism that engages or disengages the snares on the snare head.

Tension Rod: A threaded metal rod that is inserted into the lug casing. The tension rod can be tightened or loosened to get the desired sound of the drumheads.

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha marching and concert snare drums.

Click here for more information about Yamaha snare drums for drum sets.

The Disklavier Piano Pedals

Arthur Rubinstein Quote saying "The more I play, the more convinced I am the pedal is the soul of pianoforte!"

Legendary pianist Arthur Rubinstein was famously quoted as saying, “The more I play, the more convinced I am the pedal is the soul of the pianoforte!” No doubt he was speaking about the piano’s damper pedal, also known as the sustain or right pedal, but to some extent his comment is also applicable to the una corda, or left pedal.

In the early days of electronic keyboard instruments it was typical for the sustain pedal to record just two values: on and off. Today, however, some sophisticated reproducing pianos (including the Yamaha Disklavier), hybrid keyboard instruments (for example, the Yamaha AvantGrand), and digital pianos (like the Yamaha Clavinova) are capable of recording a wide range of incremental values that represent the full motion of the sustain pedal.

Image of a pedal going down

The Importance Of Incremental Pedal Data

Let’s take a look at how the sustain pedal is used in an actual performance and the reasons why incremental pedal data is so important. Here’s a graphic representation of a pianist’s performance of a work by Frédéric Chopin:

Sample graphic representation of a pianist’s performance

As you can see, in this section the pianist moves the pedal swiftly between fully down and fully up. Yet despite the rapidity of those pedal movements, the Disklavier is able to record incremental pedal locations between fully up and fully down, and that same data is then used to ensure smooth pedaling on playback.

Now let’s take a look at the sustain pedal data in a performance of a piece by Claude Debussy. In the sample below, notice how long the pianist keeps the pedal in the half-pedal range between fully up and fully down:

Image sample of how long the pianist keeps the pedal the half-pedal range between fully up and fully down

In this range of pedal motion, the damper only slightly engages the strings to a greater or lesser degree, thus only partially damping the notes. It would be impossible to reproduce the half pedaling accurately if the instrument could not record and play back incremental pedal data:

Pedal motion animation showing greater or lesser notes degree

This is another example of how the Disklavier’s advanced technology captures and plays back piano performances with all of the expression and nuance of the original performance.

This article was adapted from a video by pianist and music technologist George Litterst.

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha Disklavier Pianos.

Eco-Friendly Plastics from Plants

Recorders are some of the most-played instruments in the world, and millions of students in countries all around the world play their first notes on a Yamaha recorder every year.

Yellow plastic pellets in a glass bowl.
Ecodear pellets before processing.

The vast majority of Yamaha recorders are made from ABS plastic, a very durable and safe material that has withstood the test of time. However, traditional plastics are made from petroleum oil, a resource that’s certainly seen its fair share of controversy over the years. What if there was a way to make a recorder with a plastic that didn’t use as much petroleum, but still sounded just as good?

Yamaha found the answer in Ecodear®, a special type of plastic that replaces some of the oil needed by normal plastics with resins extracted from corn and other plants. The result is a material that has about the same durability and characteristics of regular plastic, but one that reduces carbon dioxide emissions by an estimated 20%.

How is that possible? Since plants absorb carbon dioxide from the air when they grow, the corn used to make Ecodear traps some of the carbon dioxide already in the atmosphere, which in turn is then locked into the plastic itself. If a million recorders were made using Ecodear instead of regular plastic, the growing plants would reduce carbon dioxide emissions by about 230 tons, or the equivalent of a car driving around the earth 25 times!

Ecodear has another feature that’s especially beneficial for recorders: It’s a little more dense than ABS plastic, which changes the acoustic response of the recorder. This gives recorders made from Ecodear a more mellow and centered tone, with improved resistance and breath control. Many players feel that this makes Yamaha 400-series Ecodear recorders feel and sound much closer to an instrument made from wood … but with more durability and at a fraction of the price.

Ecodear® is a registered trademark of Toray Industries.

Making Magic Happen

Ever been to Disneyland or the Disneyland Resort? If you’ve been fortunate enough to visit the “Happiest Place on Earth,” you know that music is at the core of the Disneyland experience. Everywhere you go, your sense of place and era is reinforced by carefully selected background and live music.

For more than a decade, the company that has provided the tools to make that magic happen is Yamaha. Disneyland is one of the largest employers of musicians in the world, and Yamaha outfits those players with professional grade instruments including drum sets, pianos, guitars — even the Disklavier that occupies the lobby of Disney’s Grand Californian Hotel and Spa. Yamaha mixing boards also help enhance the sound experience at many of the resort’s theaters and music venues, including the flagship Hyperion Theater, home to Disney’s “Frozen – Live at the Hyperion.”

As a further measure of the two companies’ unwavering support for music education, Yamaha also provides instruments and support for the prestigious Disneyland Resort All-American College Band, a 21-member ensemble selected from the top college-band students in the country, all of whom receive a world-class summer internship program.

Orchestra Disneyland child playing the drum.

Launched at Disneyland in 1971 and Walt Disney World in 1972, the All-American Band was designed to cultivate relationships between the Disneyland Resort and colleges and universities around the country. The collaboration between Disney and Yamaha allows the members of the AACB to excel in their musical careers, and in turn, inspires young children to explore the joys of making music.

For the past eleven years, Yamaha has hosted annual lunchtime concerts by the AACB on the front steps of Yamaha Corporation of America headquarters in Buena Park. On July 31, the AACB gave a rousing performance on Yamaha flutes, clarinets, saxophones, trumpets, flugelhorns, trombones, mellophones, tubas, horns, marching bass drums, and a Silent Bass — all to the delight of employees, children from the Boys and Girls Club of Buena Park and Mayor Virginia Vaughn.

Disneyland orchestra child doing a hard jump.

“It was really exciting for the All-American College Band to perform at Yamaha,” exclaims Nathan Hatton, the ensemble’s 2018 teaching assistant. “We had so much fun performing several of our favorite tunes in such a different and unique setting!”

Photographs courtesy of Steve Leiken.

 

 

Click here for more information about the Disneyland Resort.

Six Reasons Why Watching Football at Home Is Better than Going to the Stadium

For football fans, there’s nothing like the excitement of watching your favorite team sweat it out on the field with bone-crunching blocks, gravity-defying catches and, at times, the graceful elegance of an end zone dance. Watching it unfold in person is an experience that some fans view as a requirement for appreciating the game, but the stadium experience isn’t for everyone. In fact, some could argue that today’s home theater provides the ideal way to enjoy a football game — free from the hustle and bustle of the stadium and with the best seat in the house: yours.

There are plenty of reasons why watching football at home is better than attending in person. Here are just six of them:

1.  Audio/video quality. Unless you’ve got loads of money to spend on field-level seats or corporate boxes, your view of the action at the stadium will look more like a flea circus than a football game, even with the help of binoculars — assuming you’re even allowed to bring these in past security. Watching on a quality home theater system while listening in surround sound gives you an experience that’s hard to beat. With high-definition video, you see every play perfectly, including the wince of a quarterback as the ball narrowly misses his target. High-quality speakers (or a sound bar with wireless surrounds) allow you to hear things like plays being called on and off the field, play-by-play commentary and the grunt of the gridiron combatants as they battle it out, all in full surround sound. You don’t stand a chance at hearing or seeing that level of detail at the stadium.

2.  Multiple angles. To capture the action on-screen in a way that makes the most of technology like 4K Ultra video, NFL broadcasters have upped their own game with a wide array of video cameras: sideline still cams, above-the-field drone cams, sky cams and end zone cams — another way that the in-home experience goes above and beyond what you can get at the game with just one angle at your stadium seat.

3.  The power of choice, price and what’s in your fridge. Long lines, limited options and high prices. Show of hands — who’s lining up for this? The nationwide average for the most basic and smallest of adult beverages at professional stadiums is nearly $8! What’s more, your beverage brand options at the stadium may be limited based on vendors and sponsorships, while you can enjoy any number of alternative drinks at home. You can also create a varying buffet of chips, dips, cheese, popcorn, sliders, nachos and more — and for much more agreeable prices — when you enjoy the game at home. Tip: Link a wireless speaker to your home entertainment system to broadcast audio of the game in the kitchen. That way, if the custom nachos are taking extra long to pile up to the right height, you won’t miss a single audible. So stock your fridge with what you want, wait for no man and enjoy to your heart’s content.

4.  Quality time with friends and family. Watching football is a great way to bring people together, and there’s no question that hearing yourself talk to an aunt or uncle you haven’t seen in years is way easier at home than in a decibel-shattering stadium. Plus you can have anyone you want over to watch the game without having to purchase a group of tickets at $100+ apiece so you can all sit together. And, with your remote in hand, you can turn the volume up or down at any time, depending on how much you’d like to hear those around you in relation to the game.

5.  Comfort. Between the cost of gas, the stress of getting to the stadium and the price for parking (not to mention the potential for bad weather), keeping your car at home is a no-brainer — and a comfortable armchair or sofa beats a hard plastic saucer with limited leg space hands-down! In addition, at home you don’t have to contend with grumpy seat-holders next to you who moan when you ask permission to squeeze past during a much-needed restroom break (after an $8 beverage or two). You also don’t have to dress for the elements — whether it be sunscreen, a parka or a snowsuit.

6.  Control. Let’s face it: it’s impossible to have much control over anything that happens at a football stadium. Sure, those mismatched socks that you wore during the playoff push in the late ’80s might help influence a successful two-point conversion, but mitigating fans’ reactions is a different thing entirely. It’s hard to pay attention to the game when you have 50,000 fans shouting, talking, obstructing your view or adding other distractions. Yes, it could be argued that those are some of the reasons for attending a live football game. But if you want to know what you’re in for (other than the outcome of the game), there’s no place like home. You can use your remote to pause and play action at will, lower and raise the volume (useful if you want to drown out over-excited guests), even link the sound in multiple rooms if you enable wireless speakers with a system like Yamaha MusicCast. In your home theater, you can make the game come to life in ways that the stadium experience could never compete with.

So the next time you’re considering putting in the time and effort to attend a pro football game in person, remember that your living room is only steps away and might well offer you more excitement and a better experience at a lower cost, both physically and financially. Plus the money you save could instead be put into a surround sound system that would make you the Sunday destination of choice for all of your family and friends!

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha AV products.

The Importance of Neutral Monitoring in the Home Studio

In a recent blog posting entitled “How We Interpret Sound,” famed acoustics expert Dr. Floyd Toole stressed the importance of listening to music through neutral loudspeakers — that is, speakers that have a flat frequency response, so they aren’t coloring the sound.

This is something that’s probably even more crucial when recording or mixing music, because you need to be able to trust what you’re hearing — especially if you’re working in a home studio, which typically has little or no professional acoustic treatment. If your monitors (the common term for studio speakers) aren’t providing you with an accurate representation of the frequency content of your music, it will adversely affect your ability to record and mix successfully. And if your finished mixes sound good in your studio but nowhere else, odds are that your monitors are at least partially at fault.

The Difference Between Speakers and Studio Monitors

Speakers intended for use in the home or in the car often hype specific frequency ranges to make music more exciting to the listener. However, quality studio monitors are designed to reproduce sound accurately. They reveal the music as it truly sounds so that you can adjust the frequency balance with confidence, assured that your productions will translate everywhere they are heard.

Why Accuracy is Necessary for Recording and Mixing

Here’s what happens when you create a mix while listening on speakers that accentuate the bass and the treble ranges: You set the bass instruments — mainly the bass guitar and kick drum—at what seem like the right levels, based on what you are hearing, and you use EQ to reduce the highs on some of the sounds that seem overly bright.

Makes sense. But the problem is, when you listen to that mix on other systems, it’s all out of whack, with too much bass and too little high end — a boomy, dull mess.

This didn’t occur because of your ears or your mixing skills; it happened because of your monitors, which made it difficult (if not impossible) to gauge the frequencies correctly. You mixed based on what you were hearing but what you were hearing was inaccurate. That experience is akin to an artist trying to paint colors correctly while wearing orange-tinted glasses. It’s virtually impossible.

So neutral monitors are vital when mixing, but they’re equally important while tracking. After all, the sound you hear in your speakers will influence how you position microphones or set equalizers. If your monitors are inaccurate, you’re more likely to make bad decisions all around.

Yamaha makes two different monitor lines: the MSP Studio series and the HS series. All are self-powered, two-way, bi-amplified loudspeakers (which means there are separate power amps for the woofer and the tweeter), and they come in a variety of sizes: 7″ and 5″ for the MSP Studio series; and 8″, 7″ and 5″ for the HS models. The larger sizes offer extended bass response, but the smaller models can be better for space-challenged studios or studios on a budget. An optional subwoofer, the HS8S, can be added to any of these to take bass response down to 20 Hz.

Set of 3 white speakers and 3 black speakers.
The Yamaha HS series monitors are designed to reproduce audio without coloring it.

Near-Field Monitoring Plays A Big Role, Too

Professional studios are constructed so that their acoustics don’t distort the frequency response of the monitors. In a home studio, however, you’re generally working in an existing space, not a purpose-built one. Adding acoustical treatment can be expensive and may require invasive installation onto walls and ceilings in ways that might not be practical in many living situations.

Fortunately, most loudspeakers made for the home studio are near-field monitors, which are designed to help minimize problems caused by room acoustics. The concept behind near-field monitoring is that the listener is able to sit close enough to the speakers so that he or she hears mainly the direct sound coming from them, and a relatively low percentage of reflected sound from the walls, floor, or ceiling. Near-field monitoring won’t eliminate all acoustical issues from your studio, but it will help lessen their impact.

Where you position your monitors is vital for ensuring accuracy. First, unless you have no other options, don’t place your monitors in corners or right up against a wall; try to set them at least five feet away.

In addition, set up your monitors in an equilateral triangle, with your listening position (where the back of your head will be) at one point and your monitors at the other two. Ideally, the left and right speakers should be the same distance from each other as they are from the wall behind them. If you can, set up your listening position so that it is centered between the walls to your left and right but not centered between the front and back walls.

The monitors should be angled inward equally (at roughly 30 degrees), so they’re pointing right at your head, which shouldn’t be more than a few feet from either speaker. (The less distance there is between your ears and the monitors, the less your room acoustics will interfere with what you’re hearing.) Additionally, because high frequencies can be quite directional, for the most accurate monitoring the speakers should be set up so that the tweeters are at approximately the same height as your ears when you’re seated at the listening position.

Diagram showing speaker placementer in a room.
Correct near-field positioning minimizes the effect of room acoustics.

It’s also a good idea to use isolation pads, available commercially from a variety of sources. These go under your monitors and decouple them from the surface they’re on. They help reduce the chance of sympathetic resonance developing that could overly boost or otherwise interfere with low-frequency response.

Built-in Correction

Although properly configured and positioned near-field monitors will get you a long way towards the goal of neutral (and therefore accurate) monitoring, the specific physical aspects of your studio might still interfere enough to distort their accuracy. Fortunately, Yamaha HS and MSP monitors are equipped with a number of controls for adjusting both the high- and low-frequency response.

Closeup of panel with switches.
Room Control and High Trim switches on the back of the HS monitor allow you to match response to room acoustics.

For example, the Room Control on HS monitors is specifically designed to reduce the low-end build-up that can result from monitors that are placed too close to a wall, while High Trim enables you to boost or cut the high end as needed.

The bottom line is this: When you use quality monitors and place them correctly, you’ll be able to enjoy the benefits of a neutral monitoring system. You’ll hear the frequencies in your music more accurately, and your mixes will translate better. As a result, you’ll be able to concentrate more on making music … an end goal well worth pursuing!

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha studio monitors.

Five Reasons Vinyl Is Making a Comeback

It started with Thomas Edison’s first phonograph in 1877, which played back sound from wax cylinders coated in tin foil. That quickly evolved into the vinyl record and the turntable, which eventually became a mainstay in most households. In the mid-1960s, along came cassettes and 8-track tapes, making it easy to play your favorite tunes in the comfort of your automobile. It seemed as if recorded music couldn’t possibly get any better (or, at least, any more convenient).

And then digital recording was invented, opening the door to CDs and then to digital streaming, which is at an all-time high right now, with individuals listening to more than 32 hours per week in 2017, according to Nielsen Music.

But if you think that vinyl has been relegated to the role of a niche collector’s market, you’d be quite mistaken. The Nielsen Music 2017 U.S. Music Year-End Report stated that over 14 million vinyl records were sold in the United States alone that year — the highest level since 1991, according to Billboard.

You’d think that such a resurgence in popularity must have a definitive cause and effect relationship with a market event. But it turns out that the explanation isn’t quite that simple. Here are five possible reasons why vinyl is making a comeback:

1. Tangibles. Sure, subscription streaming services provide unprecedented access and convenience, but something is lost too: ownership. When you play streamed digital files through an app, you don’t own that music. On the other hand, vinyl records are physical items that you can collect, hold in your hands, purchase in person and discuss endlessly with record store clerks and fellow music lovers. Vinyl also offers other tangibles, such as album artwork and liner notes; if these things are even offered by streaming services, you better know where to click.

2. The Cool Factor. Nearly half of all current vinyl record buyers are under the age of 25, according to record industry research site MusicWatch, and with every new generation comes a new outlook on the past, present and future. Some millennials have made an art of taking dated concepts like fedoras and ponytails and making them relevant and cool again. If you doubt this, visit your local record store. Chances are you’ll spot a man bun, a flannel shirt or some other identifiable accoutrement of this popular sub-culture. Clearly, repackaging old albums and calling them retro makes them attractive to trend setters and trend chasers alike.

3. Vinyl Collectors. Serious record collectors are helping drive the rebirth of the medium: There’s something to be said for the thrill of finding a rare LP in a random cardboard box at the back of a tiny record store and being able to add it to your personal collection at home. What’s more, MusicWatch reports that 27 percent of vinyl buyers are 36 or older. That should come as no surprise, since collecting records is a means for people who grew up with vinyl to reconnect with their youth.

4. The Listening Experience. How people listen to music has definitely changed, thanks to the popularity of streaming music. Earbuds and computer speakers have come to predominate, but it’s a fair bet that vinyl lovers are still spending time and money on dedicated Hi-Fi setups in their homes. Yet having a nice set of speakers along with a quality turntable and stereo receiver is only part of the traditional experience. It’s also about sitting down and listening attentively, as opposed to the ease of playing streamed music in the background or while you’re at work. If you put on an album, it’s probably with the specific intent to sit back in your listening room and enjoy it.

5. Sound Quality. Many experts feel that the old-school analog audio provided by vinyl sounds superior to digital audio — especially the lossy (compressed) digital formats used by streaming services. It’s true that there are better digital playback formats available, such as FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec), but you’ll have to search them out specifically (and possibly pay extra for them), whereas vinyl is readily available from online sellers and at your local record store.

Learn more about vinyl with our blog posting Appreciating Vinyl Records … and the Best Way to Enjoy Them.

Yamaha Clarinet Bore Taper Explained

At first glance, the Yamaha CS series clarinets and SE series clarinets may appear somewhat similar. However, there are several important design differences that result in sonic variances, too:

  • The bore of CS clarinets provides a clear, focused tone with excellent projection. The sound is well-centered and extremely flexible, providing a wide pallette of tonal colors.
  • The SE bore produces a warm, round tonality with an abundance of resonance and rich overtones. SE series clarinets blend easily with other instruments, yet are equally suitable for solos.
Clarinet CS and SE keys closeup.

As shown in the illustration on the right, the CS bore is more cylindrical than the SE bore and less “under- cutting” (and more upper) than SE tone holes.

The right-hand chimney tone hole illustrations below show the difference between the tone hole shapes, and the sectional view of the two models shows the difference in bore (note also that the CS has a thicker wall than the SE):

Diagrams showing difference in clarinet bore tapers.

Click here for more information about Yamaha clarinets.

Chamber Ensembles Help Develop Student Leaders

Several students sit in a practice room, their chairs arranged in a small arc with their music sitting on stands among them.

While they lack the physical presence of a band director, they take initiative and guide themselves through rehearsal.

After warming up, they run through their pieces, making improvements and adjustments to their individual parts as well as helping their fellow musicians. Through communication and leadership, the small group keeps itself on track and pushes toward the goal of a solid performance.

Being in chamber groups gives students greater control over their musical experiences as they select their own repertoire, run their own rehearsals, and show their audiences in all sorts of spaces — including, nursing homes, department stores and music festivals — the level of leadership they are capable of achieving. These skills, in turn, benefit the larger ensemble.

Starting Slow

The easiest way to recruit students to chamber music is to start them off in large instrument choirs, with up to 30 members on single instruments such as tubas or flutes, says Sam Ormson, music director from Mountain View (Washington) High School.

“It brings students into the chamber music realm in a nonthreatening way,” says Ormson, whose chamber ensembles have performed at the Music for All Chamber Music National Festival. “Then as they get older, they start to form other groups.”

Ormson recommends repertoire written in four parts for students to get accustomed to the musical style of a small group while staying comfortable in the larger numbers. Once students have developed to a higher level of musicianship, he suggests introducing them to publishers’ websites to let them select their own pieces.

Teaching Solid Fundamentals

Learning how to rehearse is a key component to chamber music success. “[I] make sure we demonstrate in a large ensemble all the fundamentals students need in a small group and show them how to rehearse it, so they can go through the same process without me,” Ormson says.

The subtleties of music, such as dynamic contrast, articulation and crisp rhythms, are the backbone, says Sam Pilafian, tuba soloist and arranger for the Boston Brass quintet. “If we’re doing scales or rounds together, we’re doing them in a certain dynamic and certain articulation, [and] we’re creating a language,” he says.

Both Pilafian and Ormson say warmup progressions that last about 10 minutes are the most beneficial for reinforcing basics before moving into the day’s music. Start with long tones, then lip slurs for brass and chromatic exercises for woodwinds. Articulation and technical studies should lead to air support and breathing exercises. Finish the progression with a chorale that incorporates strong intonation and dynamic range.

Learning to Listen

Musicians must listen to the parts around them in order to balance their own parts within the ensemble. “Getting a cognitive awareness for what’s around you and the ability to play at the same volume with similar tone is fundamental to making a chamber music experience work,” Ormson says.

Pilafian, who taught at the Frost School of Music at the University of Miami and was a founding member of the Empire Brass Quintet, recommends having students stand in the far corners of the room and choose another player to listen to. He also recommends having students sing their own parts, then sing each other’s parts to familiarize themselves with all facets of the piece.

“Have [students] listen [from a position that is] the farthest away [where] they can hear and track that person and their part,” Pilafian says. “Find the principal players. It’s fun for them, and they learn to lead musically because of exercises like that.”

Rounds and call-and-response exercises also help improve students’ listening skills.

Letting Students Lead

Chamber ensembles are designed for musicians to take greater ownership. Pilafian suggests that music educators take a “coaching” approach rather than directing the groups. “You can teach your leaders to step up in chamber music without too much pressure,” he says.

Ormson helps students select repertoire and instructs them in occasional “clinician” settings but gives them freedom during rehearsal to make their own musical decisions. “I know that I might have been able to make an ensemble achieve a higher musical outcome if I’d intervened more frequently, but the measurement of success goes far beyond that musical outcome,” Ormson says. “It’s the opportunity for students to grow as leaders and musical decision makers.”

Benefits to the Band

The skills students take back to the larger ensemble benefit them as well as the musicians around them. “It’s when they get back to the band that it really pays off,” Pilafian says. “They think in ways they’ve never thought before; they learn to take responsibility for the music. They can infect so many people around them with their seriousness in rehearsal and their ability to stay focused. They have a better ear, and all those musical fundamentals are strengthened and brought to the people around them.”

Those students can then be used to set a musical example by playing a hard section for others to emulate. “The other students always listen carefully when their peers play examples for them,” Pilafian says. “When [others] mimic the students who just played, the concepts you have taught carefully to the chamber groups are transferred to the whole band with less teaching time used in rehearsal.”

Student Benefits

Musicians who have experience in chamber groups can also transition more easily to be featured players in the larger ensemble. “Band members who have had chamber music training have learned to play solo lines with enough opinion and presence to warrant a musically supportive accompaniment,” Pilafian says. “Their featured moments will help the entire large ensemble to form unified musical moments.”

In general, chamber students become more effective in all types of rehearsals. “They realize how much time can be lost by not starting on time or how frustrating it can be to have someone absent from rehearsal,” Ormson says, “I have seen an increase of student engagement and a reduction in down time once chamber ensembles get established each year.”

Last but not least, chamber ensembles prepare students for life by teaching them people skills. “Music will teach you that kind of team management at a young age,” he says. “It’s the magic and chemistry of chamber music.”

Photo © 2018 Daniel Yang, All Rights Reserved 

This article originally appeared in the 2018 V1 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Clarinetist Julie DeRoche Molds Music into Art

In the early 1980s, Julie DeRoche — who had recently received her degree in clarinet performance from Northwestern University — was juggling four jobs to make ends meet as she worked toward a fulltime career in music.

Teaching private lessons, recording commercial jingles as a freelancer, working as the first-call substitute with the Chicago Symphony Orchestra and selling mail-order clarinet accessories out of her apartment all helped DeRoche develop an entrepreneurial approach to music. She also wanted to open her own studio. “You can’t just sit around and wait for something to come,” DeRoche says. “You have to pursue it.”

Now serving as the chair for the Department of Music Performance at Chicago’s DePaul University, where she has taught for more than 30 years, DeRoche inspires her students with this mantra of perseverance. Whether making them repeat their scales again and again until they play with the desired speed and accuracy or assigning them to work with her and other professors simultaneously to perfect their audition skills, DeRoche doesn’t let her students take the easy way out. “I tell my students: ‘You’re going to do it because I don’t give up,'” she says.

Technical Toolbox

Clarinetist Julie DeRoche

Back in 1968, 9-year-old DeRoche started playing the clarinet in her school band in Oakbrook Terrace, Illinois. Although she originally wanted to play flute, she says she fell in love with the clarinet the instant she set eyes on it. DeRoche went on to spend her high school years performing in the Chicago Youth Symphony Orchestras and teaching private lessons to elementary school students.

Giving private lessons early on helped DeRoche develop a set of teaching skills that she still uses today with her university students.

For musicians who are in eighth grade and under, the focus needs to be on having fun, with some skill-building mixed in. “Get them enamored with it, but don’t forget to teach them skills, so they feel like they’re accomplishing something,” DeRoche says.

Molding elementary and middle school students starts with sculpting the perfect embouchure. “I always say, ‘Bottom lip in, chin muscle down, corners in, jaw forward, top lip stretched down and under the nose,'” DeRoche says.

For beginners in fourth grade, DeRoche doesn’t bombard them with all of this information at once. Instead, she breaks down the technique one component at a time. “I’d say, ‘Right now, I want you to focus on getting your chin down in the perfect place; now let’s play this piece, and we might have some fun with dynamics and rhythm,'” she says.

Mastering technical skills then allows advancing students to craft something beautiful. “I think of techniques as tools in a toolbox,” DeRoche says. “You have to have all the skills, so that you can build a much better, more significant artistic product.”

DeRoche has her students add some color to their music by painting in their emotions. She tells her students to think of someone important to them, down to the details: the color of their hair and eyes, the sound of their voices, the way they walk. She then asks them to think about how that person makes them feel and to weave in the resulting emotions into their playing. “When they think about how they feel, the source feels like it’s coming from their heart,” DeRoche says.

Sculpted Skillset

DeRoche worked on assembling her own toolbox when she traveled the world as a musician. While performing with the Chicago Symphony Orchestra as well as various chamber groups including The Chicago Chamber Musicians, Music of the Baroque, Chicago Opera Theater and Contemporary Chamber Players, DeRoche ventured throughout the United States, Europe, South America and Asia.

Collaborating with top-notch musicians fine-tuned DeRoche’s already well-sculpted musical skillset. “Having the opportunity to work with the best musicians [and] great conductors has made me learn so much about the depth of musical understanding you need to play at a really high level,” DeRoche says.

Recording commercial jingles for large brands such as McDonald’s, Froot Loops and United Airlines also honed DeRoche’s sight-reading and versatility since she often did not receive music prior to recording. “It’s very expensive to do these commercials, so you have to be right and you have to learn fast,” she says.

Team Approach

In 1984, DePaul University, just 10 miles from DeRoche’s alma mater, was in need of a new clarinet instructor. Professor Larry Combs reached out to DeRoche, and she added adjunct professor to the long list of jobs she was juggling at the time.

That first year, DeRoche had only six clarinet students, so she worked quickly to find ways to attract more students to the program. She started by organizing and managing summer clarinet workshops, which she co-taught with Combs. Then, she had a breakthrough. During the summer workshops, she and the other faculty members were advertising themselves as a team. “So I thought: Why don’t we create a team approach to teaching clarinet?” she says.

DeRoche decided it would benefit students to have access to more than one professor during their college careers. “It unifies the students,” she says. “Because the faculty don’t draw these boundaries, [the students] don’t have this jealousy. They support each other.”

As part of the team approach, professors evaluate each student’s needs for growth. DeRoche recalls one student who went to many auditions but often lost jobs to others with better musicality and articulation. DeRoche then worked with the student on articulation while Combs worked with him on his musicality. “He got a job pretty quickly afterwards,” she says. “We look at what the student needs and decide what works.”

DePaul’s clarinet program now averages about 25 students every year, and all wind departments at DePaul practice the team-learning approach that DeRoche introduced. “You’re constantly working to make it better, to make the level of experience the students have more professional,” DeRoche says.

Increased Inclusivity

DeRoche’s belief in teamwork and bringing people together goes beyond her work at DePaul; it has also been a major part of her work with the International Clarinet Association (ICA).

DeRoche’s first major accomplishment with the ICA was a conference she hosted at DePaul University in 1994. Her major goal working with the ICA has been to increase its diversity of performers.

When hosting the conference, DeRoche reached out to musicians from all around the world — to emphasize the “international” in International Clarinet Association — resulting in performing musicians from Germany, Austria, Belgium, Japan, Canada and countries in South America. DeRoche also focused on diversifying the performances by music genre, including jazz and folk music.

The 1994 ICA conference also got an unexpected guest performer — a Chicago janitor, originally from Romania, who spoke no English. His daughter reached out to DeRoche, translating for her father, asking if he and his group could play at the conference. “He played the most intricate music with this folk group — wild music in mixed meters,” she says. “People were amazed by him.”

From 2000 to 2002, DeRoche became the ICA’s first female president. Because of this distinction, DeRoche feels a responsibility to empower young female musicians. “When I was young, there were very few female role models, and at the time it seemed you had to be masculine to achieve success,” she says. “Times have changed. I always [make] a point of being myself, wearing jewelry, clothes I like, painting my nails, not feeling like I had to be someone other than who I am. I hope this message is true for everyone now! Just be [a] good [musician] and be yourself. It can’t be one or the other; it has to be both.”

Discipline and Compassion

In her current role as chair of the Department of Music Performance at DePaul, DeRoche spends half her time on administrative duties and continues to teach clarinet students in a one-on-one setting. “The students that come are quite serious about having the life [of an] orchestral player [or] playing in an opera, musical or military band,” she says. “That’s work. That’s [going] from doing 80 percent and being satisfied to doing 110 percent and being successful and happy.”

DeRoche helps her students achieve this 110-percent level of effort by setting high expectations for them and not resting until they meet those expectations. “I say, ‘Sorry, I know you want to stop playing scales and go on to Weber 2nd Concerto, but we can’t,'” she says. “I just keep pushing them, and then they say, ‘I didn’t think I could do that!'”

Students appreciate DeRoche’s disciplined approach. “I always felt like she pushed me in the [way] that I wanted to get better,” says Audrey Denny, one of DeRoche’s former students, who now works as a clarinet specialist at Clarinetquest, part of a retail shop in St. Louis.

Though DeRoche pushes her students hard, accepting no excuses or shortcuts, her teaching style never lacks empathy. “As a teacher, she was interested not only in me as a clarinetist but also in me as a person,” says former student Tim Zavadil, who now teaches clarinet at the University of Minnesota and plays clarinet and bass clarinet in the Minnesota Orchestra. “We discussed how to be a better person, a better communicator, a better friend.”

As an educator, DeRoche’s overall philosophy is to give students the tools they need to help themselves be successful. “We have that responsibility to teach really good quality technique and to open their eyes to why they’re doing this — to create a higher level artistic product,” she says. “I want my students to feel like I’m helping them succeed.”

Photos by Rob Shanahan for Yamaha Corporation of America 

This article originally appeared in the 2018 V1 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Clarinetist Julie DeRoche’s Keys to Teaching

In Clarinetist Julie DeRoche Molds Music into Art, we outlined how DeRoche, utilizes her extensive background in the music industry and teaching to help take her students to the next level of musicianship.

DeRoche, professor and chair for the Department of Music Performance at DePaul University School of Music in Chicago, has been teaching since she was a teen; as a high schooler, she gave private clarinet lessons to elementary school students.

DeRoche says a combination of these tips will open the door to successful teaching and learning.

Explain Methods Clearly: DeRoche recommends that educators clearly explain how and why students should do what is asked of them. “If your methods are precise and thoughtful, they will hear improvement, trust you and do what you ask,” DeRoche says.

Show Students You Care: DeRoche approaches students with discipline and empathy. “Don’t patronize young people by expecting less from them than they can produce,” she says. “Students want to know that you care about their success. As a colleague of mine once said, ‘Put one arm around their shoulder, and use the other to push them out the door.'”

Never Stop Learning: While DeRoche has a set of methods that she’s confident in, she always keeps an open mind to learning more and expanding her knowledge as an educator. “Never think you know it all,” she says. “Teaching is best done while learning.”

Photo Courtesy of Music for All 

This article originally appeared in the 2018 V1 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Festival Etiquette

Performing at a festival is so much more than “performing the music.” You should have high expectations for appearance and demeanor for performers as well as the audience. Here are some tips for your next formal performance.

Stage Etiquette

The adjudication begins the moment the first student steps onto the stage. Plan how to “take the stage” and rehearse it repeatedly. Once students are on stage, they should not speak to one another unless absolutely necessary. Smiling at the audience reflects a very pleasant demeanor, but laughing on stage is never appropriate.

Practice taking and leaving the stage quietly. The clunking of shoes is not the best way to start the performance. Ensure that musicians know exactly where their chairs are and have them stand in front of them until given the cue to sit.

For choral ensembles, row one should enter first, and the person in the center of that row should stop in the center of the riser. His or her position will help set the remainder of the ensemble.

The quick tuning check of the ensemble is absolutely appropriate before the playing of the first selection as well as in between selections as necessary. Just be sure that the tuning is timed out appropriately.

Finally, ensure that students understand the formality of the introduction of the conductor. How will this happen? Will the director take the stage, then get introduced, or does the conductor get introduced, then walk onto the stage? What happens next? Either way, the ensemble must know the procedures, so that they may respond properly.

Performance Etiquette

Students should understand that when the conductor turns around to bow and acknowledge the applause of the audience that he or she is accepting the applause on behalf of the ensemble. Thus, students should be taught to look at the director or audience and smile during the applause.

Do not allow students to turn to the next selection during this time. Students should bring up the next selection only after the director has turned back to face the ensemble. In jazz bands, soloists should definitely acknowledge applause with a smile or nod when the audience applauds for the solo.

Audience Etiquette

Be sure to address audience etiquette well ahead of time and often. If students know what the expectations are, they will behave appropriately in concert settings themselves, plus you can ask them to share this information with those who are attending the performance in support.

This information can be reinforced by having audience guidelines printed in the festival program. Music education means educating everyone — administrators, parents and even the audience — so addressing etiquette in the program by sharing it from the student perspective is a great way to reinforce the expectations.

Here are notes from a sample program that you can use or adapt:

The abilities demonstrated at tonight’s festival include audience etiquette. The following guidelines are expected to be observed while students are listening to other performances at all formal concert settings.

  • Sit tall in your seat and give your undivided attention to the performing ensemble.
  • Be a quiet, still listener and focus on the exemplary elements of the performance.
  • Remain seated during the entire performance, including between selections, of each ensemble.
  • Turn off cell phones and put them away.
  • Wait until after the ensemble’s final selection when a “Kodak moment” will be provided to take photographs.
  • Although we encourage all family members to attend all performances, we respectfully ask that you exit the hall quickly and quietly if your young child chooses to become an “active” participant in the concert.

This article originally appeared in the 2018 V1 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

3 Tips to Start a Mariachi Program

In Case Study: Celebrating Mariachi in Iowa, high school band director Ruben Newell and middle school director Patti Bekkerus from Denison (Iowa) Community Schools shared how they started a successful mariachi program.

In addition to research, patience and understanding, they offer these three tips.

Find the Right People: Newell and Bekkerus went to Las Vegas for a mariachi workshop. However, they also found resources in their own small town. Because the school district did not have a strings program, they hired a local violinist to teach strings to the students.

Involve Parents: Newell invited parents to give input. Family members enthusiastically jumped at the chance to support their students and the program by cooking cultural food for the annual Fiesta Mariachi.

Celebrate! Denison’s Fiesta Mariachi fundraiser not only makes money for the program, but it also serves as a major performance opportunity for the students and a fun time for the parents and the community.

Photos Courtesy of Denison Community Schools Mariachi Program

This article originally appeared in the 2018 V1 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Case Study: Celebrating Mariachi in Iowa

Every spring, Denison (Iowa) High School hosts a fiesta, including a taco truck, chips and salsa, and parents’ homemade desserts. But the main attraction is the Denison High School Mariachi Band.

Because half of Denison’s population is Latino, Denison High School band director Ruben Newell and Denison Middle School band director Patti Bekkerus decided that they needed a music program to embrace those students’ cultural backgrounds. “The Hispanic [students] in this town [have] always had a great passion for music,” Bekkerus says. “This was a way for us to extend a hand and say, ‘We want to share a part of your culture with everybody else.'”

Chance Encounters

female high school student singing mariachi and holding a violin with student musicians behind her.

Newell, who became the band director in 2009, wanted to make sure his music program represented the diversity of his musicians. “I wanted to be proactive, so I started looking at schools in other states where diversity is more common,” he says.

Newell found that many of these schools had mariachi programs. At first, he was uncertain about his ability to start one himself. “I thought, ‘What other towns in the Midwest have a mariachi program?'” he says. “I kind of gave up on the idea. I didn’t know anything about mariachi, and there was no one I could talk to about it.

While at an Iowa Business Conference, Newell and Bekkerus attended a clinic about starting a mariachi group by Marcia Neel, president of Music Education Consultants and senior director of education for Yamaha. They soon learned that Neel was hosting the weeklong National Mariachi Worksops for Educators in Las Vegas later that year.

Newell and Bekkerus flew out for the event where they learned how serious and diverse the genre of mariachi can be.

Getting Instruments

When starting the mariachi program back home, Newell and Bekkerus soon encountered a new hurdle: Denison did not have a strings program, so very few students knew how to play violins, guitars and other instruments associated with mariachi — nor did the school own the instruments. Their superintendent Mike Pardun came to the rescue. “[He] said, ‘We are not going to let finances be a hurdle to them; that defeats the purpose,'” recalls Newell.

Pardun funded the purchase of six violins, five guitars, and a guitarrón, which is similar to a bass guitar. Newell and Bekkerus started the mariachi program with eighth graders to ensure that students would enter high school with some experience the following year.

A Growing Strings Section

After a successful first school year of mariachi in 2011-2012, the educators set their sights on a new goal: improving the skills of the string players, many of whom were primarily brass or woodwind musicians. They found a local violinist Claudia Rihner.

When Rihner joined the Denison mariachi family, she specifically worked with the students on their aural skills. The students warm up with scales, first in unison, then in rounds, so they can listen for the intonation. Rihner also tells students to hum their parts before playing on their instruments, then asks them if their instruments sound in tune with what they just sang.

“As far as reading notes, they had a strong foundation,” Rihner says. “The hard thing was the mechanics of the instrument.”

Community Connections

group of students in the Denison mariachi band -- all dressed in red shirts and holding various instruments

Currently, the mariachi program comprises three ensembles: a middle school group with eighth graders, one larger high school group that anyone can join and a selective audition-based high school group. While they don’t play at school band concerts, the mariachi program has many performance opportunities.

The audition-based group has performed at the Iowa Music Educators Association (IMEA) Conference, the Iowa Bandmasters Conference, the Iowa Culture and Language Conference — an event for educators working with English-language learner (ELL) students — as well as at a few elementary schools.

The larger high school group performs at local festivals and community celebrations. For the middle school program, the event of the year is Denison’s Fiesta Mariachi, the annual fundraiser where all three ensembles perform.

Starting in the program’s second year, Fiesta Mariachi raises money to buy instruments and trajes — traditional uniforms. The fundraiser has the added benefit of connecting family members. Parents attend an organizational meeting to plan the fundraiser, and the first year, Newell was surprised at the turnout. “There were a lot of families I had not met,” Newell says. “A lot of them didn’t speak English. I’d say something, and the students would translate. There was a lot of nervous energy there.”

To break the tension, Newell spoke in the one universal language other than music — food. After asking parents for food ideas to serve at the event, they began excitedly sharing suggestions. “It was incredible to see; it was something I had missed seeing in our district — families feeling comfortable in our school and excited about participating in events,” Newell says.

Bridging the Gap

During the first year’s fundraiser, parents cooked all the food. Currently, a local Hispanic grocery store caters the event through a taco truck, but parents still bring in homemade desserts.

Newell remembers the first Fiesta Mariachi as one of his proudest moments with the music program. His parents even went to the event. “My mom took a bunch of pictures,” Newell says. “[She] said, ‘There was everybody there, all different kinds of people. All my pictures [show] everybody smiling.'”

Bekkerus and Rihner both cite the Fiesta Mariachi as one of the band’s most significant events of the year. “The mariachi program, in my eyes, has really bridged the gap between cultures,” Rihner says.

Photos Courtesy of Denison Community Schools Mariachi Program

This article originally appeared in the 2018 V1 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Technology Tools for the Middle School Classroom

Many technology tools exist to ease your workload and move your music program beyond surviving to thriving.

To ensure success, select resources that align with your goals, improve your efficiency and create new, meaningful opportunities to extend and deepen your students’ learning experience.

The following technology tools will make a big difference for your group, day in and day out.

Organization (Google Slides or Powerpoint)

Successful music directors identify the rehearsal objectives, have a plan for accomplishing them and share this information with the students. The warm-up and rehearsal plan and any other pertinent information can be included on a “daily rehearsal slide,” created using Google Slides or PowerPoint. Display the slide as students are entering the room. You can also consider adding a countdown timer to show when rehearsal begins.

Engagement (Plickers)

Engagement is more than an education buzzword; engagement is the key to unlocking students’ creativity and passion. One way to engage students is by providing meaningful choices that impact their learning.

Technology can help reduce friction in providing student choice. In middle school, pressure (real or perceived) to conform with the group can suppress students’ individual opinions. The free app Plickers can create a safe avenue for expression.

Plickers only requires one smart device with a camera. Students are provided with downloadable, printed cards from the Plickers website. Each card has a unique geometric pattern. Students indicate answers to questions by holding up the card with the corresponding answer positioned at the top. The teacher then scans the cards by panning the classroom using the Plickers app and the camera on their smart device.

Plickers also makes it easy to do quick, informal assessments. Teachers can ask true/false or multiple-choice questions with up to four possible answers.

Here are some example questions:

• What is the dynamic we performed for the trio section of the march? (Students choose p, mp, f or ff.)

• Our goal for today was accurate notes and rhythms for the “A” section of the piece. Did the band achieve this goal? (Students indicate yes or no.)

The teacher can then project aggregate responses and other data.

THE YAMAHA EDUCATOR NEWSLETTER: Energize your creativity as you build your music program!

Assessment (Music Annotation with Google Classroom)

Teaching music annotation is a great way to help students pay attention to articulation, dynamics, tempo indicators and key signature changes. Following a step-by-step guide, students notate elements directly on their sheet music and submit a picture of their homework using Google Classroom.

The Doctopus add-on for Google Sheets and Goobric web app work together to provide an efficient method to provide feedback on this kind of assignment. These tools allow the teacher to open each student submission with a rubric open in the same window. Grading is simply clicking on the level of performance for each component on the rubric, then moving on to the next student response. Doctopus also allows for both text and audio comments.

Communication (Progress Reports with Google Docs and Autocrat)

Communicating student musical progress with parents is invaluable. By using some Google Drive tools and an add-on called autoCrat, you can email parents a comprehensive and fully customizable progress report that shows the areas the student is doing well in and which areas need attention.

Suggested data points include rehearsal contributions and personal responsibility, skill development (tone quality, rhythmic skills, etc.), student strengths, areas to improve and progress toward a growth goal.

Create a Google Form and enter the class name, student names, teacher, grade level and parent email addresses. Then include the data points suggested above.

Then create a template for the progress report and merge data from the form into the report. You may want to use tables and color coded sections to organize information.

Overall, using technology can be a powerful way to help you achieve the goals set out for your band program.

Additional Online Tools

Assessment

Kahoot – game-based learning for individuals or teams

Quizlet – online flashcards and games that can be played live in groups

Wizer – engaging online worksheets

EDPuzzle – video creation and sharing with the ability to track student understanding

Communication

Smore – newsletter and flyer creation

Remind – text-based group communication platform

Organization

Google Keep – notetaking service for collecting information in a variety of formats

This article originally appeared in the 2018 V1 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

The Importance Of Improvisation

The first band I was ever in was your classic two-guitar, drum and bass lineup. We were all high school buddies, and none of us was a particularly good singer, so we simply learned the outlines of some basic songs by favorite artists, ranging from Jeff Beck and The Allman Brothers to Yes and King Crimson. From there, we used those outlines to jam, stretch and grow. We made up songs with weird chords, odd time signatures and unusual sounds from our instruments and amps.

Simply put, we improvised.

Time Well Spent

As we all went off to college, we stayed in touch with each other and, to this day, we still manage to find time to get together on occasion and jam. But all these years later, I’m still realizing how influential that development time was to me.

My work involves creating music for a wide variety of television shows, and I rarely if ever find myself at a loss to coax creative and interesting sounds out of my instruments and my computer. I attribute at least part of that to the time I put in learning how to improvise — how to work around chords, melodies, time signatures and song structures. What’s more, the ability to improvise not only informs my work as a composer, it also somehow finds its way into many of my daily activities, from running my business to the way I cook!

Surprised? I was too … until I began looking into the reasons why.

Training Affects The Brain

Recent research shows that long-term high level musical training has a broader impact than previously thought. In fact, musicians have an enhanced ability to integrate sensory information from hearing, touch and sight. In addition, the brain circuits involved in musical improvisation are shaped by systematic training, leading to less reliance on memory and more connectivity within the brain. Simply put, learning an instrument and how to improvise on it can have profound effects on our mind, body and spirit.

Always Be A Student

An article entitled “What Neuroscience Teaches Us About Fostering Creativity” notes that “technology is changing how students’ brains are wired, setting expectations for faster, more interactive learning, according to neuroscientist and best-selling author David Eagleman. And the most important thing that schools should be teaching students is “cognitive flexibility”: the ability to be creative and put ideas together in new and innovative ways.”

I feel that the art of improvisation is just that, with the ultimate goal of achieving a unique result. But that doesn’t mean you can tell your brain to just start creating. You have to work at it and it may not come easily. With that in mind, you should always try to be a student. Even if you have to school yourself, it’s valuable to absorb as much knowledge as you can, using the latest technologies and resources (including this blog). Having that knowledge tucked away in your back pocket allows you to push the boundaries of improvised creativity.

Bend, Break and Blend

“The unconscious brain is ruthlessly efficient,” Eagleman continues. “It is looking for the easiest path [to a solution]. You have to shake off that path.” And one of the ways to help push past that boundary, he suggests, is to do something called bend, break, blend — to practice changing objects or ideas to suit a different purpose, break them into smaller components and then blend or remix them to create new objects or ideas. This is something I do constantly to foster creativity. I find that I often have to take an idea and bend, break and blend it into something it wasn’t before I started.

For example, I might take a piano chord and reverse it in my DAW, then blend in a large amount of reverb and delay. From there, I might route it into a guitar amplifier plugin and add an unusual amount of distortion and edge. Voila! What may have started out as a nice piano chord for a travel documentary might now be better suited for a crime drama or police show — all because I was able to bend, break and blend it. And because I’ve taken the time to learn my craft, it becomes a skill I can use during improvisation.

It Isn’t Just About Music

As I mentioned earlier, learning how to improvise not only can help your music, it can enhance your life generally. In the kitchen, I tend not to follow recipes exactly when cooking. Instead, I use them as an outline, then add a dash of this and a sprinkle of that to bring my own flavors to the dish, based upon past experience of knowing which combinations will taste good and which won’t. I improvise daily in my business approach too. For example, I will prioritize a job that needs immediate attention over what I’m currently working on at the time, even though I may not feel like doing so.

It’s all about learning to go with the flow and knowing what will best help you get the end results in a timely and well thought-out fashion. Don’t get frustrated if it doesn’t just happen. Push through the challenges and know that new ideas will come out of your hard work. Believe me, it’s worth it.

 

Check out Rich’s other postings.

How to Fight Feedback, Part 1

One of the biggest challenges in live sound is dealing with that pesky, always unwanted gremlin called feedback. In this two-part series we’ll talk about what causes feedback and describe ways to eliminate it. Let’s start by talking about the importance of speaker placement, microphone pickup patterns, and mic technique.

Feedback happens when sound from a speaker reaches a microphone (or guitar pickup), where it is re-amplified and sent to the speaker again, resulting in an uncontrollable “loop.” (There is also electronic feedback, but that’s another discussion.) It usually takes the form of either a low-frequency howl or a high-frequency screech, neither of which is much fun to listen to! You’ve probably heard a form of feedback when a guitar player deliberately (or sometimes accidentally) faces their guitar toward their amp, causing a squeal to occur. Sometimes feedback occurs sporadically — for example, when a vocalist roams around the stage casually holding their microphone and it briefly picks up sound from the speakers — but most of the time it’s a constant annoyance, making it imperative that the live sound engineer deal with it immediately lest the performer (and/or the crowd) grow hostile.

Speaker Placement

The most important way to avoid (or at least minimize) feedback is to make sure that speakers are placed in front of the microphones. If they are behind the mics, then you’re actually inviting feedback because the speakers will aim sound right at the microphones, which will send the signal through the system again. Main PA speakers (“house” speakers) such as the Yamaha S112V are designed specifically to direct sound toward the audience, so as long as they are aimed at the audience and away from the microphones, the possibility of feedback is greatly reduced.

In addition, the more distance you can put between the microphones and the PA speakers, the louder the PA can operate without feedback. That’s why PA speakers should ideally be placed at the front edge of the stage, at least four or five feet in front of the performers and as close to the audience as is practical:

Diagram of setup.
Optimum PA speaker positioning.

If you’re not sure whether your PA speakers are placed far enough in front of the microphones, try this: Have a friend speak into a microphone while you slowly raise its volume in the PA. If you can make the microphone sufficiently loud to be heard throughout the room without feeding back, you’re in pretty good shape. If you start to hear feedback, then you probably need to reposition either the microphone or the speakers. If you still can’t get the microphone volume loud enough following repositioning, then you may also need to use EQ. We’ll talk more about that in Part 2.

If you’re using stage monitors, feedback can be even more problematic because the monitors are relatively close to the performers and are often pointing directly at the microphones. Like PA speakers, stage monitors should never face directly toward a reflective surface such as glass or mirrors.

Microphone Pickup Patterns

Most vocal microphones used in live sound are directional, meaning that they pick up sound coming from a certain direction and reject sound coming from other directions. For example, a type of mic called a cardioid favors sound from the front. As a sound source moves around the side of a cardioid microphone, sound is gradually rejected until the mic rejects most of the sound directly behind it, as shown in the illustration below. This is known as the mic’s pickup pattern.

Diagram.
Cardioid microphone pickup pattern.

When you graph out a microphone’s pickup pattern, you can see its polar response. In the case of a cardioid microphone, the polar response resembles an upside-down heart (thus the name “cardioid”):

Diagram
Cardioid microphone polar pattern.

Keep in mind that every mic responds in three dimensions, although they rarely are able to capture much sound coming from above or below. A cardioid microphone will capture sound strongest from directly in front, at “0 degrees.” It will reject sound most effectively from behind, at “180 degrees.” Most microphone manufacturers provide this documentation on their websites.

The illustration below shows the best location for an onstage monitor such as the Yamaha SM10V when a performer is using a cardioid microphone:

Diagram.
Optimum stage monitor position when a cardioid microphone is being used.

Cardioid is not the only popular pickup pattern used for vocal microphones. A pattern called supercardioid provides better rejection of sound from the sides, but has a small “lobe” of pickup directly behind it. The points of maximum rejection are at approximately 120 and 240 degrees, as shown below:

Diagram.
Supercardioid microphone pickup pattern.

This is important because if you face a monitor toward the rear of a supercardioid microphone, it is likely to feed back due to that little lobe. It would be better to place a monitor at 120 and/or 240 degrees, where a supercardioid microphone rejects sound more effectively:

Diagram.
Optimum stage monitor position when a supercardioid microphone is being used.

The hypercardioid pattern is similar to supercardioid but with a few differences. Hypercardioid rejects a little better on the sides but has a larger pickup area in the rear. Also, the points of maximum rejection for a hypercardioid mic are around 105 and 255 degrees.

Mic Technique

Equally important to placement of speakers and the microphone pickup pattern is proper mic technique — something that many performers unfortunately take for granted. First and foremost, when using vocal microphones, the singer’s mouth should be very close to, and directly in front of, the microphone grille — a position known as “on-axis.” Being on-axis helps make a performer’s voice louder than any surrounding noise, which is especially important when they are singing or speaking softly because that’s when you’ll need to turn up the microphone level. We want to make the voice louder, not the background noise. Encourage the singer to keep the mic centered in front of their mouth during the entire performance in order to ensure consistent levels, and stress to all the performers beforehand that they should never point the front of a microphone directly at any speaker.

Here’s a photo that shows the proper way to hold a vocal microphone:

Hand holding microphone.
The correct way to hold a microphone.

Notice that the hand is not covering any part of the grille. This is really important because if you cover portions of the grille on a directional microphone, then the mic will actually become omnidirectional, meaning it will pick up sound equally from all directions — and that usually results in feedback occurring at much lower levels.

In contrast, here’s how not to hold a microphone:

Hand holding a microphone and hand is gripping grill.
Unless you love feedback, don’t ever hold a mic like this!

Cupping your hand over the front of the mic will also produce feedback because a hand is actually a pretty good reflector for sound.

Click here for Part 2, where we look at the concept of “ringing out” a sound system and describe how to use EQ to eliminate feedback.

Photographs courtesy of the author.

 

Check out our other Tools of the Trade postings.

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha PA speakers and stage monitors.

The Art of Looping

If you’ve been following my postings here on the Yamaha blog, you may have gathered by now that art and artistry are an integral part of who I am, what my music is about, and how I live my life.

Label inside a guitar as seen through the strings.

Color has the power to stimulate us, relax our minds and change our overall mood. Without tonality and color, we have chromaticism: white to black, with shades of gray in-between.

Texture adds depth to shape. Curves, lines and bumps, with random density, give our senses interesting terrain on which to gaze and feel in our hands.

I often marvel at the natural architecture, texture and color variations of the native plants, trees and flora as I drive down the country lanes where I live in Holualoa, Hawaii. The wonderful aroma of coffee beans roasting in the air; the sound of Coqui frogs singing on the leaves; the taste of freshly cut pineapple on the tongue; sun-drenched salt water as it dries on the skin. This is my cocktail of sensory awakenings that inspires new music and a true understanding of what being alive means to me.

Musicians tend to be very sensitive souls, absorbing the energy around us through every one of the five senses. Where we live, work and play all affect our general happiness, creativity and productivity. I make conscious choices every day to honor how I feel about everything I do, where I lay my head at night and the people I spend quality time with. I’m also a firm believer in extra-sensory perception and multi-sensory experiences that often expand beyond the basic five senses into other realms of possibility, like “channeled energy” or gifted input — things that I cannot always explain.

You might call this pure inspiration, your muse or spark of creativity. Whatever it is, I try to tap into it and not question where it comes from. It’s a gift that I’m always thankful for when creating music.

Man singing and playing guitar onstage.

For example, I carefully select my set list of songs during live performances, choosing to play only the songs that I love and that resonate with me as an artist. When I’m asked to play a song that I don’t like, I politely decline and offer a suitable option. This way, I stay true to who I am and remain authentic in my artistry. I believe the audience can feel that from you; they know when you love the songs that you play!

As a solo performer, I’m always looking to create the most compelling musical soundscapes that I can with one guitar, vocals and percussion loops. I work hard on my song selection and arrangements, honing them to the point where I know I can improvise arrangements “on the fly” at any point within each song.

I’ve also chosen the best equipment and guitars possible for the varied iterations of my live performances. Some gigs require nylon-string guitar, while others are best done with acoustic/electric or electric guitar. Each setup has its own signal chain, mixer and P.A. system requirements. It’s a lot of work to refine each set format and to dial in the sound for every venue and its particular acoustic properties, but it’s a necessary part of the job.

One of the most invaluable tools for me in live performance is the looper pedal. This simple device allows me to record any part of my performance and then layer ideas and improvisations over that section of music, enabling me to play melodic lines over rhythm guitar parts, extend my song performances and introduce varying textures to my audience. In effect, I’m maximizing my sonic “real estate” without having to hire other musicians.

Would it be better to use live musicians? In some cases, yes, but often budgets and space at a venue preclude me from hiring other players. On the positive side, scheduling performances, setting up gear and getting a great live sound is much easier!

Acoustic guitar laying on its side on a wood surface.

I often use my Yamaha NCX1200R nylon-string guitar at live gigs where I need a soft sound for background music. The guitar’s A.R.T. (Acoustic Resonance Transducer) Pickup/Preamp System delivers the natural sound and dynamics of the nylon strings and I love that I can blend the bass and treble response of the under-saddle contact pickup. There’s also a built-in three-band graphic EQ that I can use if I need further tonal adjustments.

I often pair my guitar with a Line 6 Helix® processor to utilize its stereo amp/effects modeling and built-in looper; together, this provides an all-in-one live solution. I’ll run my percussion loops and vocals all into Helix and fade in and out of performances using the unit’s expression pedal.

Guitar head leaning against a control panel.

How difficult is it to work with a looper in a live situation? If, like me, you are looping percussion and guitar at the same time, it can be very hard. The timing and execution of the loop process has to be spot on. If the loop “in” and “out” points aren’t precise, you’ll hear an overlap in the percussion each time the loop cycles and the groove will suffer. Also, you’ll have to stop the percussion tracks immediately after recording the loop as they may start to run out of sync with the loop that you’ve just recorded. Add to that the fact that this is all happening live, while singing and playing the guitar. It’s an art form that takes time to master.

On the other hand, working without percussion loops will be a lot easier, since the timing can be less precise/mechanical and more in line with your own rhythm skills.

The Videos

Here’s a video of me at one of my live performances. If you look closely, you can see the loop process happening in real time:

And here’s a studio performance:

The chord progression is two bars in length and all of the chords are derived from the key of G. (The capo is at the second fret, so the actual pitch is A.) The tonal center is that of the G chord, so we have an Ionian progression (i.e., resolution to the first chord in the key of G).

Here, improvisations using the G major scale will be a great option. For example, place a capo at the second fret and play these shapes:

I: G    Am7  I  C    Dadd4  :I (Note: the actual pitch is I: A   Bm7  I  D    Eadd4  :I)

As you can see, once I’d recorded the initial guitar part, I kept the looper in record mode and played a snare drum part with my finger on the top of the guitar. The snare attacks are on beats 2 and 4 of both measures. Note that if you keep the looper in record mode you’ll need to stay silent until you record the next part, so get in the habit of muting the strings in-between recording the overdubs, as I do here.

Next, I added another chordal rhythm part for texture and harmonic variation. Here are the chord voicings I used for that second guitar part:

I: Gadd2   Am11  I  C5/2(#11)  D/F#  :I

When all of the overdubs are recorded, I exit the record mode by clicking the loop switch one more time. This ends the recording process but continues the playback of the loop. Remember to do that before improvising!

For the solo played in this video, I used the G Major scale and some nice double-stop 6ths. Note that I’m paying close attention to my phrasing to find the “pocket” and placement for the double-stop ideas. You’ll also notice that I’m using simple motifs so as to “let the chords do the work.”

The Wrap-Up

Here are some key elements that will help you execute clean loop performances:

  • Determine exactly what you are going to play before you even think about looping an idea.
  • Define the initial guitar part and how many bars (measures) the progression will be. Work out your overdub parts in advance if you can and have a clear understanding of the key, tonal center, scales and chord tones before improvising.
  • Practice the section of music you want to record and settle into the tempo. If you are using delay (as I often do), tap tempo while you’re playing to synchronize the delay time as well.
  • While playing your loop progression, tap your foot in time with the tempo near to where the loop record button is located. (I know this sounds obvious, but make that a convenient place near your foot.)
  • When you are ready, click the record button on the downbeat of the first bar of the progression. Stay in time and click the record button again at the end of the phrase you want to record.
  • Don’t rush or be anxious: relax as you execute the punch in and out points. If you aren’t used to playing and coordinating with your feet, this is going to take time to perfect … but it will get easier.

The more you practice looping, the better the results will be. Think like a composer/arranger and only layer in parts that enhance the audio palette and make musical sense.

For more guidance on looping, check out my Truefire course called “Creative Looping Handbook.”

Photographs courtesy of the author.

Check out Robbie’s other postings.

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha classical and nylon-string guitars.

Click here for more information about the Line 6 Helix.

Lyrics 101

A good marriage is a team, right? It’s when two people complement one another, each making the other look better. A balanced, harmonious effort from both parties will yield the best results. Same as in a song. But if the words fall short, worthy music can be left alone at the altar. 🙁

I’ve been mentoring at a few different music festivals recently, helping aspiring (and some relatively advanced) songwriters better understand their craft. In critiquing their work, I’ve noted a number of common missteps when it comes to lyrics.

Here are some of them. You might think these are no-brainers, but it can be hard to have perspective while you’re in the heat of the moment writing a song.

– The First Line: This is sometimes the hardest of all the lines. It may take you as much time to write it (or rewrite it) as the rest of the song. Make sure it’s attention getting. Make it impossible for me to ignore you.

– Context: In high school we’re taught that in the first paragraph of an essay we should reveal things like who-what-when-where. Remember? (I hated it!) Well, the same goes for song lyrics. A little orientation in the first verse gives the listener some frame of reference as to what’s about to unfold.

– Pronoun Consistency: Is it “I”? Is it “You”? Is it “We Are The World?” Pick one. And stay there. Or else I’m not going to know whose point of view the song is coming from.

– Tense: Are we in the past? Is this happening now? Is it something you imagine for the future? Be consistent here too. Yes, we can be in the present looking back and remembering when, but make sure to be clear that you’re looking over your shoulder.

– Mood: Are you hopelessly in love? Irreparably devastated? (I hope not.) Are you sick of the world? Feeling empowered? Keep the thread of that emotion throughout.

– Flow: There can be a stream of tasty ingredients adjacent to each other line after line, but if they don’t logically connect to each other the listener is going to be confused. (My husband often reminds me that the audience isn’t in my head. What? I assume that they’re going to know what I mean even if I leave out that one thing. Sadly, they won’t.)

– Concept: It may be a noble effort, but saving the planet is too ambitious to realistically solve in one song. A song should zero in on a brief moment in time. If you put it under a microscope there is usually much to say about it.

– Overthinking: Did you have me at hello and then jump the shark with TMI? Less is more.

– Variation: If all your lines are the same length and cadence I’m going to be yawning by the second verse. Mix ‘em up. Long, short, full sentences, snippets. (You’ll find more about this in our blog article Words and Music.)

The funny things about these observations is that I learn so much about making my own lyrics tighter by listening to yours. The most important takeaway (and the one I’m constantly reminding myself of, even after 20 years of professional songwriting) is: Be Yourself. What makes a song remarkable and memorable is a universal concept with a unique point of view — something that everybody can relate to but nobody has ever said “quite like that.” So ask yourself what makes you you and try to avoid chasing the last Taylor Swift hit because nobody is going to write her song better than she is.

Last but not least, I have been surprised to hear some writers say that they write just once a week. I don’t get it. Writers write! They get better by writing. Try to put time aside every day to “journal” even when you’re not in the mood, or nothing in particular happened lately that you feel is worth journaling about. You might be surprised. It’s the best way to get through the noise and stumble on the magic.

 

Check out Shelly’s other postings.

How We Interpret Sound: An Interview with Dr. Floyd Toole

Interpretation is a critical part of life. It determines our likes, dislikes and personal preferences regarding everything from food and clothing to living environment and choice of entertainment.

Photo of Dr. Floyd Toole.
Dr. Floyd Toole.

To better understand the concept of how people interpret sound, we interviewed famed loudspeaker and acoustics expert Dr. Floyd Toole, who has devoted his entire career to acoustical and psychoacoustical research for the National Research Council of Canada and Harman International.

How We Interpret Sound

For some people, great sound is considered to be whatever is popular in current culture. That might be rumbling bass and just enough treble to hear the melody or it could mean an engrossing listening experience that envelops like a blanket on a cold day. Then there are the physical aspects of what is actually coming out of a loudspeaker — something that most people are not aware of, although it’s simpler than you might think.

According to Toole, internal perception and scientific truth are the two elements at play in the way we perceive sound. “The reality is that in the history of audio, the mythology that has built up about certain brands and speaker designs and electronic algorithms and so on … [but] precious few if any of those comments are based on double-blind tests, so the opinions people have expressed were partially formed before they ever heard a sound,” he says. “I did my first double-blind sound test in 1966. I thought I would [use] a [single] loudspeaker and that would be that, [but] this particular loudspeaker was awful. A friend brought [another] … loudspeaker in and it was very different. So I did [a] randomized double-blind listening test. It was very important [that] people not know what they were hearing.”

Everyone in the test agreed on what they liked, and all favored the same loudspeaker — the one with the smoothest and flattest response. Yet the results were not what Toole expected, and to his surprise, he discovered that there had never been any serious scientific research done on the relationship between measurements and subjective opinions of loudspeaker sound quality. He spoke to his boss and began his life’s work.

“I spent the rest of my [career] doing that,” he says. “Everything that followed since those early tests has confirmed those findings: The smoothest, flattest loudspeakers win double-blind listening tests. However, when you go into a store and remember what you may have heard about a product, or listen to a salesman, your mind is partially made up. When listening “blind,” without the biasing influences of price, size, brand and appearance, people turn out to be remarkably similar in [terms of] what they like and dislike.

“Recordings sound better when played through neutral loudspeakers. The goal is for everybody in the audio universe to have neutral loudspeakers. And we’re not far away,” Toole states. “Most of the professionals and [many] loudspeaker manufacturers have figured it out. The problem is, the populace at large is not well-informed.”

“If you are fortunate enough to see a set of anechoically measured curves (i.e., measurements taken in a room with virtually no sonic reflections—Ed.) that are smooth and flattish on and off axis, the loudspeaker is likely to sound good — [that is,] neutral,” he adds. “There’s no mystery to it: If you don’t like what you hear in that loudspeaker, don’t blame the speaker, blame the recording.”

How to Optimize Sound in Your Home

To make the most of your home sound system, it’s no secret that you’ll need quality speakers. “If you purchased a good loudspeaker to begin with, leave it alone.” Toole advises. “Several room equalization techniques exist, implying that any loudspeaker in any room can be made to sound good. [Equalization] may or may not improve the sound of a poor loudspeaker, but unfortunately there is a good chance you could degrade the sound of a good loudspeaker. Two ears and a brain respond very differently to a complex sound field — and are much more analytical — than an omni-directional mic and analyzer. That said, equalization at bass frequencies is almost always helpful in dealing with room “boom” – [that is,] resonances in small rooms.”

According to Toole, the first thing you should do when setting up your home sound system is to adjust all channels to be at the same levels, and so that they all arrive at the right times. Many receivers and processors offer controls that can can assist with this.

In terms of room acoustics, if you start with well-designed loudspeakers, normal furnishing may be all you need. “Some audiophiles think all reflections are bad,” observes Toole, “but such rooms are oppressively dead. It turns out that a happy medium is easily achieved in normal rooms. Bookcases, lamps, tables, chairs, carpet and drapes — all of these things bring room acoustics into the range of acceptability. If you live in such a room, just buy some very good loudspeakers, hook them up, turn on your system, play something you like and enjoy it.”

“Take note of the fact that there is substantial scientific research that has been done to provide guidance,” are Toole’s parting words. “Manufacturers of quality loudspeakers tend to reveal the performance of their products. Others don’t. You should be skeptical of those who don’t.”

Photograph courtesy of Dr. Floyd Toole.

 

For more information about Yamaha home speakers click here.

Add These 3 Exercises to Your Percussion Practice Sessions

As a percussionist, there are three things that we should always work on — reading, rolls and ear/listening.

I know it is naive to believe that these are the only things to work on, but if you can continue to improve in these areas, you will be more prepared for the future.

Student performers tend to only focus on the next thing they need to prepare for — an audition, a rehearsal or a performance. Believe it or not, this is also true for professional musicians. With my work, teaching, family and playing schedule, I don’t have as much time to spend in the practice room as I would like. But when I feel like skipping practice, I always remember this quote by golf legend Ben Hogan:  “Every day you don’t practice, you’re one day further from being good.”  

This quote inspires me to keep practicing. I have found that if I practice these three areas every day, I can continue to grow as a musician and maintain my chops.

Click on the links below to learn about:


Reading

All musicians should spend 15 to 30 minutes each day sight-reading. It doesn’t need to be melodic reading (although that it is probably weaker than your rhythmic reading), it just needs to be music you have never seen before.

Where can you get music? The number one source of free, public domain sheet music is IMSLP.org. For sight-reading, I would suggest starting with a Bach or Mozart violin or flute sonata. If you have someone else who wants to do some sight-reading, check out the Bach Inventions. There is so much music on the site, I promise you will never have a problem finding something new to read.

There are many beliefs about how you should sight-read something. Generally, once you play through it once, you aren’t sight-reading any more. Here are my steps:

  1. Scan through the music and see what the most difficult part is going to be. That section will determine my tempo. I always use a metronome when sight-reading because it keeps me “honest.”
  2. Depending on your level, you can use the metronome on every beat or just the down beat of the measure. Once I figure out my tempo, I make sure I check out the road map and key signature and then start reading.
  3. Read through the piece without stopping. Once I have read through the piece, I spend 30 to 60 seconds going over the most difficult passage and then I read it again. Sure, the second time is not “sight-reading,” but I think it’s important to improve upon my previous reading of the piece.

CHECK IT OUT: The OSM Series Snare Drums

Once I have read it a second time, I put it away. Instead of printing all of these pieces, I use my laptop or iPad to view the PDF. It saves paper and I have material to share with my students. I also like sight-reading with other people to add a level of accountability. Vivaldi or Mozart string quartets are perfect for this.

Rolls

Rolls are universal on all percussion instruments and something we need to work on daily to maintain the skills. I do a regime of SD roll exercises that include single stroke, double stroke, triple stroke and multiple bounce rolls. Working on single stroke rolls helps me maintain my timpani and mallet rolls. I enjoy working on double and triple stroke rolls with different fulcrum to accurately execute the different roll types. Two great books for roll development are “Developing Dexterity” by Mitchell Peters and “The Roll” by Emil Scholle.

Here is an exercise to work on snare drum rolls:

In my opinion, developing your ear is one of the most underrated and under-practiced areas for most musicians. Working on your ear should be an ongoing daily activity. Work on listening and being more aware of what you are doing and what you are hearing.

Here are some suggestions to develop your ear:

  1. Practice singing intervals. You can use your smartphone and download a piano app and/or a tuning app and incorporate this into your daily practice.
  2. Play duets and chamber music. This will help you work on your ensemble listening skills.
  3. Listen to a lot of different music styles. It’s great to listen to your favorite group, but during the week try and listen to at least one artist you have never heard before. Practice playing with the recording and transcribing the grooves on the album.
  4. Practice with your metronome more often.
  5. Go hear live performances and talk about what you heard with a friend or colleague. See if you are hearing the same things that other people are hearing.
  6. Videotape and/or record audio of your rehearsals and performances. When you are ready to run through something, record it. When you’re standing behind an instrument, you hear things a lot differently than you do from an audience’s point of view.

Reading, rolls and listening — these are the three key areas all musicians should continue to develop to be successful. Honing your skills in these areas will help you further develop your musical skills.

Words and Music

Have you ever read something that “clicked” and stayed with you a long, long time? Ever hear a piece of music that did the same?

You may be surprised to learn that the reasons you fall in love with a song (or symphony) are very similar to those that make you connect with a short story (or novel): Something in it “speaks” to you, making you feel as though the songwriter/composer/author were addressing you, and you alone.

It might seem that this comes down to emotional impact, and to a large degree, that’s true. How you are feeling at the time — the trials and tribulations of life that you’re going through when you’re first exposed to the work — has a huge bearing on how something resonates. I know that, for me, the songs I strongly related to as an adolescent (as well as some of the books I read at the time) are the ones that have stayed with me throughout my entire life, and that seems to be true for most people I know. There have been numerous scientific studies that prove the point empirically, but really this is just one of those common sense things: The angst we all go through in our teenage years and early 20s — when we are trying to figure out who we are and how we fit into the world around us — not only creates lasting memories but shapes (and to a large degree determines) lifelong affinities.

In terms of music, it’s true that, in some cases, the words being sung are what “speak” to you, but I think that relatively few people gravitate to a song for that reason alone. After all, nobody goes around humming lyrics! Besides, there are plenty of powerful and enduring musical works that are purely instrumental.

I would argue that, most of the time, what makes us relate to a song, sonata or symphony is the way the music itself is constructed, in the same way that what appeals about a short story or novel is the way the sentences are constructed (or, in the case of poetry, the way the words are strung together). I was reminded of this recently when I came across the following quote from the late Gary Provost, a noted author and writing instructor:

This sentence has five words. Here are five more words. Five-word sentences are fine. But several together become monotonous. Listen to what is happening. This writing is getting boring. The sound of it drones. It's like a stuck record. The ear demands some variety. Now listen. I vary the sentence length, and I create music. Music. The writing sings. It has a pleasant rhythm, a lilt, a harmony. I use short sentences. And I use a sentences of medium length. And sometimes when I'm certain the reader is rested, I will engage him with a sentence of considerable length, a sentence that burns with energy and builds with all the impetus of a crescendo, the roll of the drums, the crash of the cymbals--sounds that say listen to this, it is important. So write with a combination of short, medium, and long sentences. Create a sound that pleases the reader's ear. Don't just write words. Write music. - Gary Provost

This advice was, of course, aimed at writers, but it could just as easily be applied to songwriters and composers, as well as to musicians of every stripe.

Put in musical terms, what Provost is describing is phrasing, a word that Wikipedia defines as:

The way a musician shapes a sequence of notes in a passage of music to express an emotion or impression. A musician accomplishes this by interpreting the music … by altering tone, tempo, dynamics, articulation, inflection and other characteristics. Phrasing can emphasize a concept in the music or a message in the lyrics, or it can digress from the composer’s intention.

This is pretty much on the money, though I personally would amend the first and second sentences to include songwriters and composers, who have an equal capacity to shape music to convey emotion. John Lennon, who seemed to have an inborn instinct for phrasing, is perhaps the perfect example. Listen closely to the way he shifts the lead vocal patterns in his song “I Am The Walrus,” creating interest in what is essentially just a fairly boring five-note melody. Or check out “Strawberry Fields Forever,” with its abrupt meter change from 4/4 to 3/4 in the chorus that adds a sense of urgency and contrasts powerfully with the laconic and rhythmically straightforward verses.

Frank Sinatra was another master of phrasing. The way he stretches some notes and clips others, starting some on the beat, others just before or after it in his rendition of the song “New York, New York” is the secret sauce that makes the recording iconic. Or, for another great example of the way a vocalist can bring new life to a song, take a listen to Bobby Darin’s still astonishingly hip 1959 recording of the song “Mack the Knife,” which was composed by Kurt Weill and Bertolt Brecht for light opera way back in 1928. Of course, there are a slew of modern vocalists, from Sam Smith to Ed Sheeran, Celine Dion to Adele, who pour a ton of emotion into just about every note they sing, giving each song their personal stamp.

Phrasing is also what distinguishes one instrumentalist from another. Take any classical or jazz composition and listen to how it’s played by any four skilled soloists. You’ll likely hear four quite different interpretations of the same piece — sometimes subtle, sometimes radical, but with each adding new intent to the composer’s original conception, as memorialized in dots on a line.

It’s all deeply personal and subjective, of course, but I think we can derive some universal truths about the importance of phrasing, in both the literary and musical worlds. And so, with a nod to Gary Provost, this is the advice I would offer to writers of words and writers of music alike … and to performers of music as well: Don’t just write words; craft lasting documents that sing to the reader. Don’t just compose (or play) notes; create lasting works that speak to the listener.

These are the guideposts to originality … and the keys to success in your chosen field.

 

Check out Howard’s other postings.

Choosing the Right Bass Guitar, Part 1: Four-String or Five-String?

Life is often at its best when you have choices, but sometimes having good choices makes for hard decisions. Such is the case for bassists who are wondering whether to buy a four- or five-string bass. Who knew that adding a single string could complicate things so much?

It’s fair to view the four-string bass as the standard bearer against which all other bass concepts are measured. It was an established instrument decades before the electric five-string bass evolved from an experimental oddity into a bonafide option in the mid-1970s. Now, with many years of design refinements under its belt, the five-string bass — with a burly low-B string added to the traditional four-string’s E-A-D-G — is considered almost mainstream, to the point where many bass manufacturers offer five-string instruments. (All Yamaha BB basses and most TRBX basses are available in four- and five-string configurations, and the BBNE2 Nathan East Signature Model is a five-string as well.)

Here are the pros and cons you need to know when considering whether a four-string or a five-string is right for your arsenal.

Four-String: The Pros

Electric bass guitar.
Yamaha TRBX604FM four-string bass.

The physical characteristics of every bass are subtly different, but they boil down mostly to string spacing, neck width, neck profile, scale length and overall weight. When you step up from a beginner four-string bass to a pro four-string model, those factors may change very slightly in one direction or the other, but they will seem far more extreme when you move from any four-string to a five-string bass – something we discuss in the “Five-String: The Cons” section below. Sure, you’ll gain access to more notes and more flexible hand positioning on a five-string bass, but will the trade-off for “more” be worth what you have to get used to as a result, and how will it impact your playing? So ask yourself: Do I need the extra string, or do I just need a better four-string bass?

Sometimes buckling down to get better at what you already know is better than jumping into something new, and sometimes having more note choices is actually a bad thing. When it comes to bass, the right note is far more important than the most notes. You may think that a five-string bass will act like steroids for your creativity and take you to some new level of greatness, but perhaps mastering your playing within the “limited” confines of a four-string bass is what you need instead. And that’s certainly way better than spending time onstage or in the studio worrying about where you are on the neck or overthinking whether you should play a note on the low-B string. The four-string bass is really all you need to lay down a tasty, economical groove and has more than enough range for you to play an innovative solo.

Four-String: The Cons

There’s nothing inherently wrong with a four-string bass, but if you’re a pit, studio or session musician who is regularly expected to transpose parts and deal with key changes, playing a four-string may not be enough to keep the gig. Of course, you could get a little extra low-end out of a four-string bass by adding a drop-D tuning machine or using an octave pedal in your signal chain, but those hacks still won’t get you below a low C, and even then, those lower notes still won’t sound tight. If the material you’re playing relies heavily on the extended low range, a four-string bass simply can’t compete with a five-string.

Five-String: The Pros

The biggest advantage of the five-string bass is its extended lower range. From the fretted low-E all the way down to the chest-imploding low-B, that fifth string provides a gateway for exploration into previously uncharted territory. The expanse down to the low-B is considerable — both felt and heard — and rewards you with thick and palpable low-end note choices that a four-string bass can only deliver via altered tunings or effect pedals that color your tone.

Photo of artist.
Nathan East with his signature Yamaha BBNE2 five-string bass.

Exciting possibilities open up on a five-string bass when you realize a song in C can now be played an entire octave below where you’d normally play it on a standard four-string. That type of sonic shift enables you to alter the entire character of a verse, a chorus, a lead section or even an entire song … and not just your part in it.

An additional bonus to having an extended lower range is that, as your bass patterns migrate lower, your sound will naturally carve out more isolation in the overall mix because your note choices won’t regularly compete with mid-range frequencies from guitarists and vocalists.

But perhaps the biggest benefit a five-string bass brings to the party is how that extra string can simplify the way you play your basslines from nearly every position on the neck. For an extreme example, think about the need to dramatically shift your hand position on a four-string bass to play a descending two-octave run. On a five-string bass there is no sweeping change of position — all it takes is a subtle shift down for the same outcome. The end result is more efficient hand positioning and less wasted energy, and with more note options available.

These are big upsides, but they come with some caveats too …

Five-String: The Cons

If you use a pick or play slap bass you’ll quickly realize that palm-muting the B-string is a necessity unless you like the incessant, rumbling drone of an open low-B. If you’re a finger-style player (as opposed to using a pick), you’ll likely rest your thumb on that bottom string as you play, but you’ll still need to be ever-mindful of muting it as you move around the fretboard.

And with that low-B string in mind, is your amplifier and speaker cab up to the task of reproducing these lower frequencies? Some bass amplifiers, cabinets and speakers aren’t adequately designed to actually reproduce the true fundamental frequencies of even a four-string bass’ lowest notes, and those deficiencies will be magnified as you plumb the lower range of a five-string bass. If your rig isn’t up to the task, you might be underwhelmed by an apparent lack of note definition. Even assuming your rig is actually capable of delivering the lower frequencies, you’ll need to stand slightly further away from it to actually hear things the way the low-end gods intended. (The laws of physics dictate that lower frequencies require longer sound waves, so it’s quite possible the audience will hear you better than you will.)

Perhaps more critical is the fact that you’ll invariably notice that most five-string basses feel different in your hands compared to four-string basses. For starters, some five-string bass designs rely on a 35-inch scale length to keep that low-B string tension taut (an inch longer than the 34-inch standard found on many four-string basses). But you’re more likely to notice that a five-string will either have narrower string-to-string spacing or a wider fretboard (especially as you move up the neck) to accommodate the B string. This also means that neck’s profile (its curvature and thickness measured from the exposed face of the fretboard to the back of the neck) may have different contours, may be slightly thicker, and may feel heftier. Depending on your personal taste and the bass in question, these nuances can be subtle or substantial, but these are all deviations from the basic four-string design that may require you to make frustrating refinements to your playing technique, particularly if you’re a slapper. It all boils down to what you’re used to and how comfortable you are adapting your playing to get what you want.

The most important thing to remember is that this doesn’t have to be an either/or decision: In a world where there are so many great four- and five-string basses to choose from, you can have one of each!

Be sure to check out Part 2: Active vs. Passive Basses

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha basses.

 

Genealogy of the Flute Family

The flute has its roots in ancient times, with a history that is perhaps longer than any instrument other than the recorder.

Let’s take a look at some little-known facts about this seminal woodwind.

The First Flutes Were More Like Recorders

The flute has its origins in the reed pipe. This works on the same principle as the grass whistles that children make by snapping off stalks of grass and blowing into them.

Transverse flutes (held horizontally like today’s modern flutes) made out of animal bones were used in Europe in the Paleolithic era. However, it was not until the sixteenth century, during the Renaissance period, that prototypes of today’s flute first emerged.

The term “flute” was originally applied both to pipe instruments held sideways (i.e., transverse) and those held vertically. This explains why, up until around the middle of the eighteenth century (the era of Baroque music), the word “flute” was commonly used to describe the vertically held recorder. To distinguish the transverse flute from the recorder, it was referred to in Italian as the flauto traverso, in German as the Querflöte, and in French as the flûte traversière — all of which mean “sideways held flute.”

Early flutes did not offer keys. Flutes in the Renaissance period had an extremely simple construction, consisting of a cylindrical body with an embouchure hole and (usually) six finger holes. They could also only produce certain semitones.

In the latter half of the seventeenth century, flutes with a conical body and a single key began to appear. With this mechanism, for the first time virtually all semitones could be played. Today this instrument is known as the “baroque flute.”

Theobald Boehm, a German wind instrument manufacturer, essentially created the modern-day flute, which he demonstrated at the Paris Exhibition of 1847. This instrument had a metal tube with numerous keys attached. With earlier flutes, it had been difficult to produce a good sound, and the intervals between the notes had been variable. Boehm’s instrument overcame these shortcomings and was a dramatic improvement over previous flutes. It included a lip plate — a curved, oval-shaped metal plate that is connected to the body of the flute by a component underneath it known as a riser. This was created so that a metal flute would have the same thickness as a wooden flute at this point.

The Piccolo

The piccolo is approximately half the length of the flute and uses the same fingering techniques. At first glance, the piccolo looks like a miniature replica of the flute. On closer inspection, however, various differences are evident. First, there is the material used for the body. While most flutes are made of metal, nowadays the majority of piccolos are made of wood. This is because the piccolo has a higher register, and metal piccolos can sound too piercing and therefore not blend well with other instruments. Second, the main tube of the piccolo is cone-shaped (conical), tapering off toward the tip. The flute used to be the same shape, until Theobald Boehm adopted the fixed-thickness cylinder in the nineteenth century, establishing this new profile. However, the tapered shape is more suitable for the register of the piccolo. Finally, there is the embouchure hole. The type of embouchure hole normally used on the piccolo today has no lip plate. All these features make the piccolo look like the flute of yesteryear.

The Flute Family

It is not unusual for a performer who plays the flute to switch to other members of the flute family: the piccolo, alto flute and bass flute.

As shown in the illustration below, the piccolo is pitched an octave higher than the flute and produces a brilliant, high-pitched sound. With a length of approximately 30 cm, the piccolo resounds loudly in the performer’s right ear when the instrument is played. The alto flute has a slightly gentler sound, while the bass flute boasts a total tube length of around 130 cm and is pitched an octave below the flute:

Diagram of the note range of the flute family.

Video Examples

Here are four videos that demonstrate the sonic differences between the members of the flute family.

First, Bach’s Solo Partita No. 2 played on the bass flute:

Next, Bach’s Siciliano on the alto flute:

Here’s Bizet’s l’Arlésienne performed on the flute:

Last but not least, the second movement of Vivaldi’s Piccolo Concerto in C Major on the piccolo:

This posting is adapted from the Yamaha Musical Instrument Guide.

For more information about Yamaha flutes click here.

For more information about Yamaha piccolos click here.

Home Theater on a Budget, Part 4: Luxury System

If you’re ready for the ultimate in home entertainment, this final installment in our “Home Theater on a Budget” series is for you. Here are some helpful suggestions for stepping up to a luxury system — one that will not only provide you with endless hours of enjoyment but make you the envy of all your friends!

AV RECEIVER

AV receiver.
RX-A3080 AV receiver.

There are many options for high-end home theater receivers on the market but the most important factor in choosing the right one is knowing what you need. For example, if you’re looking for connectivity options galore, consider the Yamaha AVENTAGE RX-A3080 9.2-channel AV Receiver with MusicCast. It offers the ability to run Zone 2, 3 and 4 all at once, along with 4K Ultra HD functionality and multiple MusicCast features such as voice control with Amazon Alexa and wireless surround capabilities with Yamaha MusicCast 20 and MusicCast 50 wireless speakers. The RX-A3080 also includes Surround:AI that automatically optimizes the sound in real time and ESS SABRE DACs (Digital-to-Analog Converters) that cut down signal noise drastically for professional quality digital audio. While it’s true that some luxury receivers on the market offer similar functionality when it comes to the number of channels and technological capabilities available, each brand offers proprietary features that may or may not be a fit for you. Make sure you research thoroughly before buying!

MAIN SPEAKERS

Large floor-standing speaker.
NS-F901 floor standing Soavo speaker.

Luxury home theater speakers should offer superior audio reproduction and power to spare, as well as the ability to guide sound to your ears instead of off the walls. Yamaha NS-F901 floor standing Soavo speakers fulfill all these requirements and are distinguished for their stylish appearance and transparent sound when reproducing data-rich, high resolution audio sources.

CENTER CHANNEL SPEAKER

Horizontal speaker.
NS-C444 center channel speaker.

The primary function of a center channel speaker is to keep dialogue at the forefront without it getting lost in the surround mix behind things like gunshots, explosions and other ambient sound. A good option here is the Yamaha NS-C444 center channel speaker, designed specifically for home theater applications. It’s magnetically shielded and incorporates dual 5″ diaphragm cone woofers and a 1″ aluminum dome tweeter that utilizes an exclusive waveguide horn for improved imaging.

REAR SURROUND SPEAKERS

Two stereo speakers next to each other - one with the filter cover on; the other with the speaker and subwoofer exposed.
NS-333 bookshelf speakers.

To complete a 7-channel or 9-channel system, you’ll need two sets of rear speakers that can capture subtle elements like wind blowing or water rushing up from behind in your favorite action movie. Yamaha NS-333 bookshelf speakers incorporate a two-way bass reflex design that integrates a 5″ Polymer-Injected Mica Diaphragm (PMD) cone woofer and a 1″ aluminum dome tweeter with an exclusive waveguide horn. When setting up your rear surround speakers, be sure to plan out where the wires will run — either above or below the floor or through the walls — and be sure to place them on a sturdy surface such as a speaker stand or bookshelf.

IN-CEILING SPEAKERS

In-ceiling speaker.
NS-IC800 in-ceiling speaker.

If you want the most from your home theater, you should consider adding in-ceiling speakers for height and even more subtlety. Yamaha NS-IC800 in-ceiling speakers feature a slim design for easy in-ceiling or in-wall mounting. They incorporate an 8″ blue PP (polypropylene) mica cone woofer for high performance mid-low sound reproduction and a 1″ fluid-cooled soft-dome swivel tweeter for pure high frequency with precise sound positioning. Whichever in-ceiling speakers you go with, bear in mind that it takes some effort to remove them once they’re installed, so make sure they’re durable and built from quality materials.

POWERED SUBWOOFER

Large square speaker.
NS-SW1000 subwoofer.

In a 5.1-channel system, the “.1” stands for having one subwoofer. But for an extra kick, why not boost your bass by having two subs? By providing dual subwoofer pre outs, the Yamaha RX-A3080 and all Yamaha AVENTAGE receivers give you the ability to run two subs with any setup. The Yamaha NS-SW1000 powered subwoofer is a good choice here since it provides 1,000 watts of digital power, plus a stable and accurate low range response — important in everything from fantasy movies to the rumble of engines in your favorite sci-fi film.

By upgrading your components to the very best on the market, you’ll be able to enjoy home theater like never before. If you’re setting up your own system without professional help, be sure to do your research thoroughly. A valuable resource can be the Yamaha AV Setup Guide, which provides step-by-step instructions for your AV receiver and system as a whole.

ACCESSORIES

Be sure to leave room in your budget for speaker wire, HDMI cables, speaker stands and any other accessories you may need for your system — an important tip even for home theater veterans.

After your new system is installed and set up, kick up your feet, press play on your favorite flick and get ready to pop the cork. You’ve reached the pinnacle of home entertainment excellence!

Check out the other installments in our “Home Theater on a Budget” blog series:

Part 1: Starter System
Part 2: Intermediate System
Part 3: Advanced System

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha AV products.

Case Study: Building a High School Band Program from Scratch

When Daniel Berard walked into his job interview at Fossil Ridge High School in Fort Collins, Colorado in 2004, he had a clear vision of how to start the band program from scratch. He pictured the program one, two, five and 10 years down the road and hoped the administration would buy into his plans.

“I laid out what I thought we might be able to do at Fossil Ridge, and that resonated with the people who opened the building,” recalls Berard, who had previously been a high school band director for 10 years before working toward his master’s degree in music education and instrumental conducting at Colorado State University.

Berard became a critical member on a core team of about a dozen individuals who opened the high school. Since the birth of the band program, he has striven for music excellence at Fossil Ridge as the performing arts department chair for the last 10 years and currently as the director of bands.

Then-principal Dr. Dierdre Cook wanted the band program to set the school apart from others, citing it as “one of the foundational cornerstones” for a successful high school. “I knew a marching band would be important, and I knew it had to be the right band director, and Dan Berard is the right band director,” she says.

The band program has about 180 students this year, but 13 years ago, it had only 20 students. Over the years, the school’s bands have won several awards. The Wind Symphony and Symphonic Band received superior ratings at state and regional concert band festivals, and the marching band has been a state championship finalist every year since 2005, winning the 2012 and 2013 Colorado Class 5A marching band championships.

Baby Steps

As the Fossil Ridge band program took life before his eyes, Berard says the first few years involved pumping blood into the group to get it up and running. “As we were getting going, we were just taking little baby steps along the way to make sure that every time we took a step forward, it was something that [the students and administration] could feel good about,” Berard explains. “Then we just built from there, slowly and methodically, kind of putting things in place.”

The three other high schools in the area had bands, but they did not really participate in marching activities, Berard says, so nurturing the band program in a community without a strong marching culture was the hardest part in the beginning.

To grow the marching arts at Fossil Ridge, Berard analyzed successful bands from across the country. “It’s matching what we wanted to do with what was happening from around the country and tailoring it to what our situation was going to be,” he says.

His firsthand observation of other groups helped him determine the structure of his rehearsals, how to keep students motivated and how to operate the chamber ensembles. Berard also pulled from his own personal experiences learning the value of patience and the business of band.

 

Gauging Success

Logistically at Fossil Ridge, the students are split into three sit-down bands — concert band, Symphonic Band and Wind Symphony — starting with the first day of school. These three bands combine to make up the marching band in the fall. After marching season, students continue playing in the concert bands for the rest of the school year and perform in several small ensembles during the second quarter. Color guard members continue their training through a spring dance program.

While the program earned several awards over the years, Berard says he does not solely use those accomplishments to measure the bands’ successes — he also gauges everyday accomplishments during practices and dress rehearsals. “There’s a lot of what the community sees as being really successful,” he explains. “[If] you win a couple of state championships or something for marching band, everybody thinks things are great, which it is, but from the inside, I see it a little differently. The growth of the program is [measured] by having kids rally around achieving this really, really high level, and that sets the standard on a daily level. It was great to do some of these high-profile performances, but what we do every day establishes our opportunity to do some of those bigger things.”

The little successes, says Berard, snowball into large successes. Two of those pivotal moments came in 2012 and 2016 when the Wind Symphony performed at the Music for All National Festival. Berard submitted an audition video on a whim in 2012, and the performance became the first “award” from a concert band standpoint. “That started this special climb because the kids really rallied around what that meant for them and the school,” he remembers. “They knew they would be performing with some of the very best groups in the country, and that just kind of elevated everybody. That group of students set a new standard for what they wanted out of the band program, and that really challenged me. I had to get a lot better because they wanted to get a lot better.” And when the symphony went back four years later, he says the performance set even higher standards for the program.

The Heartbeat of the School

Berard says several people have spurred the band’s success over the years, with the students and administration being the driving force. Cook, on the other hand, credits Berard — who she calls the “heartbeat of the school.”

“Those kids learn skills they wouldn’t learn from anywhere else, and he rallies kids to that level of excellence,” says Cook. “Dan moves it to the next level because he believes in the quality of the program and he believes in the talent of those kids, and he’s able to bring that out and have them be successful.”

The skills students learn in band go beyond the music and technical side of playing; they learn responsibilities and lessons that translate both on and off the field, according to Cook. Seeing band students working on homework while riding the bus is a common scene at Fossil Ridge High School because they understand responsibility. The music students have higher GPAs and college acceptance rates along with less disciplinary problems.

French horn and mellophone player Morgan Herrick understands firsthand how the program helps students grow musically and academically. “The competitive nature of band and how successful our band is kind of pushes you, especially as young high schoolers, because you realize how you have a part in the whole,” says Herrick, a May 2017 graduate. “It’s your responsibility as an individual to be a part of something bigger and to help the group. I think that’s a really good skill for people going into high school — to start learning right from the beginning.”

While band programs may be expensive, Cook says that the rewards outweigh the costs because they allow students to explore future opportunities, like college scholarships and university and military bands.

Creating a Legacy

Looking back on 13 years of the band program and how it all started, Berard calls the band’s success “magical.” The band met his 10-year goals in its seventh and eighth years, but maintaining this success could be even harder, he warns.

“Going from a 95 percent to a 96 percent is way harder than going from a 50 percent to a 90 percent,” explains Berard. “It’s that one percent that is almost impossible to get to. It’s that whole ‘good-to-great’ threshold.”

Embracing music technology and discovering different ways to keep students’ attention are just a couple of Berard’s current goals. With the foundation of the band now set, these “little” goals will eventually lead to the long-term health of the program and, Berard adds, hopefully create a legacy that will continue to live on.

Photos © 2017 Susan Horn and courtesy of the Fossil Ridge High School Band Parents, All rights reserved. 

 

This article originally appeared in the 2017 V4 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

What Is an Audio Interface?

Today’s computer-based digital audio workstation (DAW) software gives you more recording and music production power than a studio full of hardware from the pre-digital days. But despite all the functionality that such software provides, its sound depends heavily on a piece of external hardware called an audio interface.

Such devices offer the connectors you need to plug in microphones and instruments for recording as well as speakers and headphones for listening. They also typically provide metering and other important features. The more you understand about how interfaces work, and the kinds of features they offer, the better positioned you’ll be to make an informed buying decision.

Connecting with Your Computer

Modern audio interfaces connect to your desktop or laptop computer via a USB or Thunderbolt port (some older ones use different ports, such as PCI, PCIe or Ethernet). Most interfaces work with both Mac® and Windows systems; many are also compatible with Apple® iOS devices, although that usually requires an additional adapter.

Steinberg audio interfaces use the USB 2.0 connectivity format, which is supported by virtually all computers. Note that you can use a USB 2.0 interface on computers equipped with the newer USB 3.0 format because USB is backward compatible.

Connecting and Converting Audio

An audio interface acts as the front end of your computer recording system. For example, let’s say you connect a microphone and record yourself singing. The mic converts the physical vibration of air into an equivalent (i.e., “analog”) electrical signal, which travels down the connecting cable into the interface’s mic input. From there, it goes into the interface’s built-in mic preamplifier, which boosts the low-level mic signal up to a hotter line level — something that’s necessary for recording. (The quality of both the microphone and preamp have a significant impact on how good a recording sounds.)

Next, the signal gets sent to the interface’s analog-to-digital (“A/D”) converter, which changes it into equivalent digital audio data — a stream of ones and zeroes that travel through the USB or Thunderbolt cable into your computer. This data is then sent to your DAW or other recording software, where it gets recorded and/or processed with effects.

Almost simultaneously, the now-digitized audio that originated at your microphone — along with any other tracks you’ve already recorded for the song — get sent back from the computer to the audio interface over the USB cable, where it goes through an opposite quick change, carried out by a digital-to-analog (“D/A”) converter, which turns it back to an equivalent analog electrical signal. That signal is now available at the interface’s line outputs to feed your studio speakers, headphone output(s), or other line-level devices.

We’re saying almost simultaneously because it actually takes a few milliseconds (thousandths of a second) for the audio to go through all these changes, from the time you start singing to the time you hear it back. That slight delay is called latency — something we’ll look at more closely shortly.

MIDI Too

Most audio interfaces also offer MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) inputs and outputs, which allow you to connect a MIDI keyboard or other MIDI controller to your computer. The input(s) allow you to play software-based instruments (“virtual instruments”) that open as plug-ins (software add-ons) inside your DAW or as standalone applications. An interface’s MIDI output(s) makes it possible to connect an external MIDI sound source like a synthesizer or drum machine and have it “played” by MIDI data that you recorded in your DAW.

Rear view of product
The Steinberg UR22C rear panel, showing USB, MIDI in and out, and line in and out connections.

Sampling Rate and Bit Depth

If you’re shopping for an audio interface, you’ve probably come across the terms sampling rate and bit depth. Sampling rate refers to how often the A/D converter “looks” at the audio when converting it into digital data, usually described in terms of kiloHertz (kHz for short), where one kHz equals a thousand samples per second. Bit depth describes how long the digital “words” are that describe each of these samples. It may seem a little techie, but all you really need to know about these terms is this: The higher the number, the better the sound … but also the larger the file size.

Some interfaces support up to 24-bit 192 kHz audio, but that’s overkill in many cases. The vast majority of people recording today use settings of 24-bit 96 kHz, which provides plenty of quality with reasonable file sizes. By comparison, the audio standard for a CD is a lot lower: 16-bit 44.1 kHz.

Ins and Outs

The number of inputs and outputs varies significantly between different audio interfaces. Steinberg interfaces, for example, run the gamut from the UR22C, which offers two inputs and two outputs (and is therefore referred to as a “2 x 2” interface) to the 28 x 24 AXR4, which has 12 analog inputs and 8 analog outputs, as well as an additional 16 digital inputs and outputs in the ADAT Optical format so that you can gang other ADAT-equipped interfaces or mic preamp units to record more channels simultaneously. When recording large ensembles or bands with drums, even eight inputs may not be enough. Always try to envision the maximum number of inputs you’ll need for the recording you plan on doing. If you can, try to leave yourself a little room to grow, rather than just opting for the minimum sized unit that will work.

View of product.
The Steinberg UR44C 6 x 4 audio interface.

Most interfaces provide “combo connectors” for their mic input channels. These accept either XLR mic cables or 1/4″ line and/or instrument inputs, giving you added flexibility.

Closeup of product.
Combo jacks accept either XLR or 1/4″ inputs.

Audio interfaces also usually provide something called phantom power for the microphone inputs. This is a 48V electrical signal that is required by condenser microphones — a type of mic that’s very popular for recording. On some interfaces, phantom power can be turned on and off for individual channels, while on others it is switched for groups of channels at a time. (Click here to read our blog article explaining phantom power.)

In terms of outputs, almost all audio interfaces provide you with a stereo pair of 1/4″ line outputs, which can be used to feed your monitor speakers. Others give you additional analog outputs, which you can use for connecting to other hardware in more sophisticated setups.

There will also be at least one headphone port, which is typically 1/4″ stereo. Some interfaces, such as the Steinberg UR44C and AXR4, provide dual headphone outputs and allow you to send a separate mix to each. This is beneficial when recording multiple musicians because inevitably, the various players or singers will not all agree on the balance they want to hear in their headphones.

Latency

As discussed earlier, there’s a slight delay called latency that occurs because it takes the audio a number of milliseconds to travel through the interface input, into the computer, back out of the computer and appear at the interface output. During recording, that can be distracting, because you’ll hear your voice or your instrument coming back a little late, which can totally throw your timing off.

One way to deal with latency is to adjust the audio buffer (also known as “buffer size”) in your DAW to its lowest value. The buffer controls the amount of time the computer allows for processing and is measured in samples (64, 128, 256, etc.). The lower the buffer, the less latency. The tradeoff is that lower buffer settings put more strain on your computer, and that can result in clicks, pops and diminished audio quality.

Screenshot.
The audio buffer setting in Cubase 9.5.

A better way to circumvent latency — and without impacting computer performance — is called “direct monitoring” (sometimes called “zero-latency monitoring”), which is implemented on many audio interfaces, including all Steinberg models. It works like this: your interface sends a copy of your input signal (pre-computer) directly into the headphone output so that you can hear it in real time (with no latency) mixed with the tracks coming back from your computer.

View of product.
The UR22C Mix knob (third from right on the top row).

Some basic interfaces provide this feature via a simple switch that allows you to choose between the direct signal and the output of your host application, but in more sophisticated interfaces, such as the Steinberg UR22C, direct monitoring is implemented with a mix control knob that lets you adjust the ratio of the direct sound to the sound returning from the computer. Advanced models like the Steinberg UR-RT series even have digital processing (DSP) built in; all Steinberg interfaces offering this feature come with an app called DSPMixFx for controlling monitoring and adding effects from your computer, iPhone® or iPad®.

View of product.
The DSPMixFx app control panel.

Sound Quality

Remember, we’re talking audio interface, so sound quality is key. That’s why the most critical components in any interface are its converters and mic preamps. Steinberg interfaces all come equipped with top-of-range converters and Yamaha D-PRE mic preamps for consistently excellent sonics.

Older gentleman standing behind and leaning on a sound board.
Rupert Neve.

The Steinberg UR-RT2 and UR-RT4 interfaces take things up a notch thanks to the addition of Rupert Neve Designs transformers that can be switched into the signal path on every mic channel. A major designer of mixing consoles for more than half a century, Rupert Neve products are renowned throughout the recording industry. With these interfaces, you can add the legendary Neve sound to your home recordings.

 

An audio interface is more than just a necessary peripheral device. It’s the heart of your studio. Whether you’re buying your first one or replacing your current interface, be sure to do all the necessary research … and always get the best model your budget will allow.

Click here for more information about Steinberg audio interfaces.

Genos MIDI Recording, Part 1

This is the first of a two-part series on MIDI recording — a powerful feature offered by the Yamaha Genos arranger keyboard that allows you to quickly capture musical ideas as well as do complex multi-track recordings.

Before we get started, it’s important to understand the difference between the two MIDI recording modes offered by Genos. The first is called Quick Recording. This is great for capturing anything from one instrument (such as a piano) to creating a full-blown arrangement with up to 16 tracks playing back simultaneously. Whenever inspiration strikes, Quick Recording has got you covered.

The second mode is called Multi Recording — great for anyone who wants to build a song track by track. For example, let’s say you want to lay down a piano first, then add drums, then some bass, etc. We’ll be talking about this mode in Part 2 of this series.

Right now, let’s jump in and do some Quick Recording. For this first exercise, I’m going to recreate a real-world situation I find myself in more often than not, where I just want to sit down, play the piano and record an idea.

The first thing we’re going to do is to make sure that your Genos is set up to just play a single instrument — in this case, piano … but not just any piano! Instead, let’s go for the glorious CFX Concert Grand.

1. Begin by assigning the CFX to the Right 1 Part. To do this, you can either touch the Right 1 graphic on the screen and select the CFX from page one of the Piano category, or press the Voice button (the white backlit button located to the right of the jog wheel, next to the Style button):

Two examples of choosing from a dashboard, one is a touchscreen, the other are buttons.

Pressing the Voice button will take you to the same category and voice selection screen as if you’d used the touchscreen:

Display screen with CFX Concert Grand chosen.

2. Next, make sure that only the Right 1 Part is ON. (You could leave other Parts ON if you wanted to record layered or split voices, but for now let’s just stick with piano):

Dashboard buttons with one button lit.

3. Then double-check that the ACMP button is off (that is, not lit):

Dashboard with multiple keys lit.

When the ACMP button is lit, you generally won’t hear a single instrument across the full range of the keyboard unless your fingering mode is set to one of the “FULL” keyboard modes. (See my blog article “Mastering AI Fingered Mode” for more on this.)

4. Now that you’re set up with your single CFX Concert Grand, we’re ready to do some recording. It’s as simple as pressing the RECORDING button, located just to the right of the SONG B area on the left side of the panel:

Someone pressing the "record" key on dashboard.

5. You will now see the Song Recording Menu pop up on the screen. Go ahead and touch Quick Recording:

Someone choosing Quick Recording from options.

6. The main MIDI Quick Recording screen will appear:

Screenshot.

NOTE: If you like playing along to a Metronome you have the option of turning that on now by pressing the Metronome icon on the screen. Changing the tempo or even tapping a tempo in is achieved by the Tempo + & – buttons as well as the TAP TEMPO button, as shown below:

Dashboard with keys lit.

7. Now Genos is ready to start recording when you are — metronome or not. You don’t even have to hit any other button; as soon as you start playing, Genos will start recording.

Go ahead and record something — it doesn’t matter how long — and when you’re finished, press the Stop icon on the screen.

8. Now you can press the Play/Pause icon to listen back. Sound good? I hope so.

At this point, you can either choose to Save your song or try again. To save, simply press the save icon at the top of the screen:

Screenshot.

9. Finally, you get to choose where you want to save your song: to the internal User memory, or to a USB device. (Note: A compatible USB drive must be inserted into one of the “To Device” ports in order to save to a USB drive.) Select either the User icon or the USB1 icon and a name selection screen will appear, allowing you to name your song:

Screenshots.

Simply type the name of your new masterpiece into the character field. You can even assign it a cool icon by pressing the Icon icon (see what I did there? ;-)) and then selecting from the pages of unique icons available to you. I’m going to go with the sunglasses:

Screenshot.

After you’ve named your song, press OK (you may have to press it twice if you’re in the Icon Select screen) and voila, your new masterpiece is named and saved. At this point, you can confidently power down your Genos and not worry about whether or not your song has been saved.

Screenshot.

If, however, you decide that your newly recorded song is not to your liking and you’d like to try again, simply touch the Rec button on the screen and this message will appear:

Screenshot.

By selecting Continue, you’ll basically go back to the beginning: It’s as if you’d just pressed the RECORDING button for the first time. On the other hand, if you touch Cancel, you’ll have the opportunity to Save and Name your song as just described.

Note that this exercise was just focused on recording a single part — in this case, piano — but you can also capture splits, layers and even full Style playing in Quick Recording mode by following the same recording steps.

All photographs courtesy of the author.

 

Click here for Part 2, in which we discuss Multi Recording mode.

Click here for more information about Yamaha Genos.

Resources for Student Recruitment and Retention

One of the hallmarks of successful music educators is their desire to continually seek out ways to “build a better mousetrap.”  For example, they look for new rehearsal and conducting techniques, innovative ideas to reach others through advocacy and more effective strategies to enhance recruitment and retention for their school’s music education programs.

These and other topics have been addressed in resources provided by the Music Achievement Council (MAC), a not-for-profit organization sponsored by the National Association of School Music Dealers (NASMD) and the National Association of Music Merchants (NAMM). The MAC resources presented below have been created by teachers for teachers to help with recruitment and retention. They are available on the NAMM Foundation Resources for Educators website. The “First Performance Concert” book costs $45 while the rest are available as free downloads:

Available for beginning band or orchestra, these “First Performance” materials help students demonstrate what they have learned in a short 30-minute concert to be presented within the first six to eight weeks after picking up their instruments. The package features sheet music, programs and a script that can be read by the school principal, a band parent or other invited emcee.

The timing of “First Performance Concert” creates excitement for parents and students alike, inspiring young musicians to practice more because they have quickly learned the satisfaction of a well-prepared show.

To further encourage retention, you can involve high school students as ushers, hosts or guest performers. In the case of band, a surprise appearance by the high school marching ensemble just prior to the conclusion of the show might be an impactful way to provide beginners and their parents with the “long view” of the music education program.

One of MAC’s most successful resources, this booklet compiles ideas and practices of music teachers, music dealers and the music products industry, including the following two key concepts:

  • Don’t miss any prospective students
  • Don’t try to avoid dropouts — rather, strive to improve retention

This guide covers 24 topics that fall under four general areas: The Classroom, The Business Side of Teaching, Telling the Story and Supporting Music Education. Many tips include supplemental videos from directors who explain how they have implemented the specific concepts.

The transition from middle school to high school has been repeatedly identified as being the most crucial period in retaining students. The key to successful retention is action.

This publication provides strategies that directors, parents, principals, music supervisors and even the students themselves can implement to create a more seamless changeover as musicians advance from middle school to high school programs.

5. Bonus: Be Part of the Music

In addition to the tools provided by MAC, check out the Be Part of the Music website created by Scott Lang. This collection of written content and video materials provides information for students and educators segmented by band and orchestra as well as by middle school and high school.

This article originally appeared in the 2017 V4 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

5 Tips to Build a Band Program from Scratch

In the blog post, Case Study: Building a Band Program from Scratch, we learned how Daniel Berard built successful concert and marching bands at Fossil Ridge (Colorado) High School. Here is how he did it.

Tip 1: Focus on People First

When band directors first enter the music field, they believe that their primary focus is to teach music, Berard says. While that is part of the job, he says, band directors should always focus on the students and band staff before the music. “It’s about the people in the room first,” Berard says. “The music will get there once the people are taken care of.”

Tip 2: Start with the End in Mind

Have a plan and a vision for the band and try to meet the goals set in that plan. Berard looked at other successful bands to find strategies he could implement. “We could draw from these great band programs and find out what was really working and incorporate it into something here.”

Tip 3: Success and Setbacks are Two Sides of the Same Coin

Band directors should remember that both victories and failures drive a band. When the band or particular students experience success, make sure to celebrate, Berard says. However, when tough decisions need to be made, the best policy is to stay fair and firm.

Tip 4: Seek out Colleagues and Mentors

Berard understands that it’s terrifying to ask for an honest opinion, especially one that a director doesn’t want to hear. But he says that the advice of others will help the band and director improve.

Tip 5: Be Engaged in the School Community

The band is just one piece of the whole school system, and Berard says it’s important to support school-wide goals. As the performing arts department chair, he collaborated with the school’s administration team. “Try to get involved in those bigger-picture educational leadership discussions,” he says. “If the discussion is about making changes to the bell system, try to be engaged and figure out how that’s going to affect the science class just as much as how it’s going to affect the band class. Then, you can see how all those pieces have to fit together instead of always arguing just for your little piece of the pie.”

photo © 2017 Courtesy of the Fossil Ridge High School Band Parents, All Rights Reserved 

This article originally appeared in the 2017 V4 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

8 Tips for Sight-Reading Success

The key to sight-reading success? Consistent daily practice.

“Sight-reading is a skill any musician can acquire,” says Michael Burritt, professor of percussion and chair of the woodwinds, brass and percussion department at Eastman School of Music in Rochester, New York. He notes that musicians will need to learn new music throughout their lives and must be able to pick up the nuances of the music quickly. “It’s an important skill, and musicians are called to do it more often than they realize.”

Dr. Charles R. Jackson Jr., part-time assistant professor of music at Kennesaw (Georgia) State University,  agrees, emphasizing that the process is just as important for the full band as it is for individuals. “Just a few minutes every day, enough to play a few measures of new music, can help an ensemble become very confident and comfortable with the sight-reading process.”

Burritt and Jackson share their tips for guiding music students as individuals and in entire ensembles toward sight-reading success.

Tip 1: Start Young

Jackson recommends making sight-reading a daily part of rehearsal starting in middle school. “As early as 6th grade, if not earlier, sight-reading has to become part of a band’s daily rehearsal schedule,” he says. “Daily sight-reading practice then becomes a normal way of musical life for the students.”

Introducing regular sight-reading at this stage also helps build confidence in young musicians. “There’s no apprehension in a competitive setting because they have over-prepared ahead of time,” Jackson explains. “Students introduced to the concept as young musicians don’t consider sight-reading difficult because they are challenged early on.”

Tip 2: Tighten the Nuts and Bolts

Teach students to dissect all aspects of the music — the “nuts and bolts,” Burritt says. This process includes reading through the notes (including any rests) and noticing any key changes, time changes, accidentals, dynamics or other markings.

“Ask your students to look at the terrain of the music and to try to hear the music in their heads before they play it,” Burritt recommends. “They should ask themselves: ‘How is the music going to sound out loud?'”

Tip 3: Write It Down

Reinforce visual learning with written exercises. Jackson has used rhythmic analysis worksheets with his students with consistent success. “We would work daily on the worksheets, studying two measures at a time,” Jackson explains. “The students would indicate beats, notes and rests with up and down arrows or numbers. The approach encompasses all types of learning styles.”

Tip 4: Scale to New Height

To recognize key signatures during sight-reading exercises, you need to practice all of the scales — even the ones that may seem difficult.

Introduce the scales in chromatic order. “It helps encourage confidence in young musicians to build the scale cycle chromatically [C, C#/Db, D, D#/Eb, E, F, F#/Gb, G, G#/Ab, A, A#/Bb, B],” Jackson says. “Then when students are presented with a piece in the key of B, they don’t consider the music difficult.”

Tip 5: Tap the Rhythm

When they read through the music for the first time — before they pick up their instruments — have the students tap the beat with their feet. “This helps the students internalize the sense of pulse,” Jackson says. “Essentially, they become the metronome.”

Another benefit? “They learn to tap in phase with their neighbor, so all the students are in phase with each other,” Jackson says.

Tip 6: Play With Friends

Regular sight-reading as part of a duo or small group helps musicians absorb the music more quickly. “When you play by yourself, you can stop and start whenever you want without impacting other musicians, but when you play with someone else, you have to keep going,” Burritt says. “It forces you to look two, three or four beats ahead. Plus, it makes sight-reading more fun.”

Tip 7: Be Dynamic

When judging sight-reading performances at festivals, Jackson sometimes encounters bands that have great balance and technical ability — yet the music lacks expression. He attributes this problem to an ensemble paying little attention to dynamic contrast during sight-reading practice.

“I compare it to a painting done in black and gray tones — how much better would it look in color?” he says. “Music is all about expression. Those changes in expression noted on the page are part of the music. The band has to make it sound like music.”

Tip 8: Practice, Practice, Practice

And finally, because it bears repeating: practice, practice, practice. As Burritt says, “The key to sight-reading is to practice it on a regular basis, to make it a consistent part of daily [routine].”

 

Keyboard percussionists and pianists face a unique challenge when sight-reading. They must resist the urge to look down at their hands. “It is a learned skill to not look at the keyboard while learning new music,” says Michael Burritt. “Keyboard percussionists must learn to play by feel.”

Repeated practice of this technique helps such musicians develop the muscle memory to read music without looking down at the instrument. “You have to trust your muscle memory,” Burritt adds. “Your ear will tell you where to go, high or low. Just keep playing.”

This article originally appeared in the 2017 V4 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Lessons Learned from Past, Present and Future Festivals

As we prepare for upcoming festival performances, we must remember that this is all about students attaining full facility of the skills required to become independent music-makers within the framework of the ensemble.

To borrow from “A Christmas Carol,” Charles Dickens‘ famous holiday tale, let’s focus on festivals past, present and future.

Festivals Past

All performances reflect the skills taught up to that point in time. In fact, festivals are the very definition of a “performance assessment.” Ensembles that demonstrate quality tone production do so because they learned the techniques required to produce that sound consistently. Those that play with proper blend and balance have been taught how to make appropriate adjustments by way of their acquired listening skills.

So why do we still hear festival performances where students do not demonstrate these qualities? Is the music too difficult? Is the director still working on developing his pedagogical bag of tricks? What can be done to ensure a more musical and impactful performance?

Festivals Present

The most memorable performances occur when our students are completely prepared and all that remains is to enjoy the moment. What does this mean for the director?

Directors must prepare students to perform with absolute confidence as individuals and as members of the ensemble. In other words, students know that they are ready because they already own it!

The festival performance should bring fulfillment to our students as music-makers and joy to the audience as the beneficiaries of an inspirational performance.

Festivals Future

The best directors continually improve their teaching skills to provide their students and future students with more comprehensive and enriching musical experiences. Whether competitive or not, adjudicated performances provide us with just this type of helpful assessment.

The festival assessment can serve as a prescription to help identify our own professional development needs and set the course for learning strategies that will result in higher quality performances in the future.

With musical growth comes a deeper understanding, commitment and passion for the art of producing the pinnacle performance and this is our target — music-making at the highest level.

 

 cover of the 2017v4 issue of SupportED featuring the Boston Brass

This article originally appeared in the 2017 V4 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

3 Teaching Tips from the Boston Brass

In the blog post, Boston Brass’ Quest to Educate Young Musicians, the members of the Boston Brass shared that education is essential to their mission.

Here are some tips that the Boston Brass members like to impart to music directors during their many clinics.

Listen to the Pros

Play recordings of professional musicians as often as possible, perhaps during the beginning of class or as students are putting together their instruments.

“It only needs to be three minutes or so of different soloists on [different] instruments each day,” says horn player Chris Castellanos. “Students need to listen to professionals just as athletes watch pros on TV all the time.”

Breathe

Incorporate “The Breathing Gym” or other breathing exercises into your rehearsal routine.

“It kind of calls the meeting to order, and everybody gets on the same page,” says trumpet player Jeff Conner. “You’re breathing the same way, everybody’s dialed in, and they’re all concentrating. They’ve gotten the tension out of their bodies, and now they are ready to play their instruments and ready to rehearse.”

Encourage Chamber Groups

With Boston Brass being a chamber group itself, Conner says that he and its members always try to encourage band directors to incorporate chamber music into their music programs.

“It’s invaluable, [and] it makes the larger ensemble better,” Conner says. “It’s something that doesn’t necessarily have to be the responsibility of the band director, but it can be duets, a jazz quartet, anything. Playing in small groups is just a great thing for students to be doing.”

Photo by Rob Shanahan for Yamaha Corporation of America 

 

This article originally appeared in the 2017 V4 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Boston Brass’ Quest to Educate Young Musicians

As you might have guessed, the Boston Brass is a brass quintet originally formed in Boston.

What you might not have known is that more than performing with a unique blend of broad repertoire and boisterous fun, the group’s first goal is to help educate as many young musicians as possible.

“If there’s a day that goes by that we don’t teach or do a clinic, it feels like it was empty,” says tuba player Sam Pilafian. As the ensemble travels around the world giving performances, its members make plans to include as many clinics, master classes and guest artist concerts as possible. “We are on the road 180 days a year,” explains trumpet player Jeff Conner. “Part of our mission is to leave as big a footprint as we can wherever we are with music education.”

Reverence for music teachers is coded in the group’s DNA. In every performance, the Boston Brass asks all past, present and future music educators to stand for a round of applause. “[At] every concert, no matter where we are in the world, I … always say that I would not be on stage if it were not for my middle school and high school band directors,” reports Conner. “And I think all of us in the group have had these experiences.”

Horn player Chris Castellanos always recognizes his mentors. “I was fortunate to have a great band director in Las Vegas named Ed Jackson,” says Castellanos. “He always made it a point to challenge us with fun assignments. He turned practicing into a game, which in turn got a lot of kids interested who would’ve otherwise not practiced at all.”

Joining Forces

In 1986, Conner founded the Boston Brass — modeled after the Empire Brass — while he was a student at Boston University. Thirty-one years later he’s the only original member and the only one that actually lives in Boston. Yet Conner stresses the group has no leader. “What’s unique about the group is we’re all equal partners,” he says. “That’s something that we really think works best.”

In addition to Conner, Castellanos and Pilafian, the group includes trumpet player Jose Sibaja and trombone player Domingo Pagliuca. Thanks to today’s technologies, they often write, arrange and rehearse music remotely, then arrive at their next location a day early in order to rehearse for a full day before performing or teaching.

“When we’re in real time, it’s a pleasure, and a lot of the gist of what has to happen has happened,” says Pilafian. “We combine the digital life with seeing each other live, and then you have two families: Boston Brass and our real families.”

Serving All Students

members of the Boston Brass speaking in front of a room full of music students at a clinic

To prepare for clinics, the group likes to communicate with band directors in advance whenever possible. This early planning makes the clinics more dynamic and tailored for specific students. “We will be in touch with the director ahead of time, and we’ll ask them: ‘What would you like for us to cover during the course of the clinic?'” explains Conner. “[If] they have a specific need, we will definitely address it. We are very flexible.”

Sometimes just hearing a clinician say something — even when their director has said the same thing for weeks on end — can be the best way to reach the students. “They pay just a little bit more attention, or it’s delivered in a different accent, or they hear it on a different level, and they run with it right afterward,” says Pilafian. “Sometimes it’s simply the change of scenery that causes the breakthrough.”

All five members of the Boston Brass participate in the clinics unless they are in residence for a longer period of time, when they may break into more specialized workshops. Their clinics apply to all musicians of all types and levels, from elementary school to college as well as adult community groups.

The Boston Brass makes sure to tell the directors that all members of their school or organization are welcome. “Our clinics aren’t brass-specific, so everything we talk about is for all musicians,” Conner says. “We always let the directors know that … if they want to have orchestra students or choir students, they are welcome as well.”

Sometimes the quintet even gets to participate in halftime shows. The Boston Brass played with the James Madison University Marching Royal Dukes in Harrisonburg, Virginia, on its high school band day earlier this season. “There were [more than 1,000] people on the field, 750 of them were high school students, and we did two clinics for all the players; [the clinics] were so big that we had to put them in a basketball arena,” Pilafian says. “That’s satisfying. That feels like a great day’s work that we got to touch that many people and influence that many people. That felt good flying home on the day after that game.”

For Your Lungs and Ears

In addition to the director’s requests, some of the most common topics covered in the Boston Brass clinics include breathing technique, increasing sound, breaking down rhythms and improving dynamics. Pilafian is coauthor of the popular, Emmy-winning “The Breathing Gym” exercise book and DVD, so that is one of the pillars of the Boston Brass’s teaching and playing.

“We’re a living lab of ‘The Breathing Gym,’ and so it’s one of the things we spend a lot of time doing,” explains Pilafian. “It makes the band sound better and only takes three to five minutes. It’s addictive because you’re getting better.”

The Boston Brass always encourages students to listen to professional musicians as much as possible. “Have an open ear to all music and listen to music played by a professional that performs on your instrument,” says Pagliuca. “You will grow as far as your ears grow. The more you listen to great music, the better you will be as a musician.”

Generations of Perspective

members of the Boston Brass at a teaching clinic

The group’s respect for educators came full circle four years ago when Pilafian decided to join as a member of the group after his retirement from teaching in colleges. “I’ve known Jeff since he was a teenager, and he fell in love with brass chamber music,” Pilafian says. “He built this incredible career for the group, and I didn’t realize he was building my retirement at the time, but that’s what happens.”

For Conner and the other Boston Brass members, performing with Pilafian is a dream come true. “It’s incredible,” says Conner. “I never would have imagined that Sam would be playing in the quintet when he was coaching us as students 30 years ago at Boston University.”

Pilafian enjoys the unusual arrangement. “It’s your job as an older professional to stop treating students like students when they become great and acknowledge the fact that they’re now your colleagues,” he says. “We’ve got years and years of experience, but we have generations of perspective on the same piece of music, so we’re all learning from each other.”

Top photo by Rob Shanahan for Yamaha Corporation of America

Photos courtesy of Boston Brass

 

This article originally appeared in the 2017 V4 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

How to Choose the Right Mouthpiece

I worked in a music store for many years, and one of the most common requests we’d get from customers was help with picking a mouthpiece. The conversation would often include something like this: “I need a new mouthpiece. I want something that let’s me play higher … and sound really good!”

Admirable goals, to be sure, but finding a single mouthpiece that gives you range, volume and good tone quality all at once is probably a bit too much to expect. This is mostly due to the physics of how mouthpieces work — the things that make it easier to play high notes also generally tend to sacrifice your tone quality.

The conversation continues with the customer saying, “My friend has this mouthpiece that’s awesome. He can hit a (insert impressive note here) with it!”

Any experienced brass player is probably hearing warning bells right about now. Just because someone else has success with a particular mouthpiece doesn’t mean that same mouthpiece is going to work well for you. After all, your jaw is different, your teeth are different, the muscles in your lips and mouth are different, even the texture of your skin and the shape of your nasal cavity are different. All of these things influence how a mouthpiece feels and responds, so what works for someone else may be a terrible choice for you. It’s sort of like trying on shoes — the shoes that a star basketball player wears probably aren’t going to make you jump any higher, assuming they even fit your feet at all!

So how should you go about picking a new mouthpiece? Knowing what someone else is playing can give you a good starting point for your search, but to find the right fit for you there’s really no substitute for simply trying things out. Here are some tips and suggestions that come from my own experience helping hundreds — if not thousands — of players in their quest to find a perfect mouthpiece over the years.

What’s the Most Important Thing You’d Like to Change?

It’s OK to want to play higher and louder and with a good tone, but the truth is you’re probably going to have to compromise at least a little to find the right balance of characteristics. If hitting that D above the staff is what’s really important to you, then go into your search knowing that’s your main goal. Or perhaps you really want to improve your endurance so you’re still playing strong after a two-hour rehearsal, or get a warmer and fuller sound, or find a mouthpiece that helps your flexibility and articulation. Different mouthpieces can assist with all of these things, but if you know what’s most important to you from the start you’ll be able to focus on the right characteristics and find a good fit faster.

Don’t Be Afraid to Try a Few Different Sizes/Models

Trying a range of different sizes to compare differences can be helpful, especially if you’ve only ever played on one mouthpiece before. If you’re fortunate, you’ll be able to work with a music store that has a variety of different mouthpieces available for you to try (and experienced employees to guide you in your search). Even if you don’t have a music store near you, you may be able to try different mouthpieces from other players in your band, or your band director might have a few different sizes you can experiment with. (Just be sure to clean any mouthpieces you borrow — you definitely don’t want to spread germs around!)

Bring Your Instrument and Current Mouthpiece to Compare

This may seem obvious, but you’d be surprised how many people go shopping for a new mouthpiece and leave their instrument at home! Sure, you can borrow a horn, but how will you know if what you’re feeling/hearing is because of the new mouthpiece or because of the instrument? Also, if you have your current mouthpiece with you, you can quickly compare the new against the old so you don’t have to rely on memory (“I think that feels better, but I’m not really sure …”).

Play a Variety of Different Music and Passages

Sure, go ahead and see if you can hit a few screamers, but also play some slow, soft passages as well as something with a lot of moving notes and fast articulations. Have some tough music that you’re working on right now? Bring that along and try playing it, too. Traditional warm-up exercises and études also work well for this. Get a good feel for how the mouthpiece responds in a variety of different situations that reflect what you’re really playing. The “boring” stuff is just as important as the higher, faster, louder stuff.

If in Doubt, Go for Comfort

There may be specific situations where getting a mouthpiece that feels difficult to play might be appropriate (such as if you’re trying to build your endurance, or if you’ve been using a cheater mouthpiece and need to fix your embouchure). However, choosing the mouthpiece that feels the most comfortable for your style of playing is usually a safe bet, which makes it even more important to try mouthpieces using your own instrument with real music that you actually play. After all, squeaking out an extra note or two doesn’t matter if you’re worn out in just five minutes!

Listen to Your Private Teacher or Coach

Maybe this should be higher on the list, but I’m putting it last for emphasis. If you have a private teacher, or are working with a coach, listen to what he or she suggests. If your teacher is available to assist you with the actual mouthpiece tryout process, that’s even better! Private instructors are going to have a tremendous amount of knowledge and insight into how you play, and they may make recommendations to correct a specific issue or guide you toward a particular sound. Don’t second-guess what they tell you just because you read something different on the internet!

Remember, it’s fine to use other people’s opinions and experiences as a starting point in your search, but ultimately, the mouthpiece needs to fit you!

Aux Sends and Returns

In the first of our two-part series on using reverb and delay, we touched briefly on aux (short for “auxiliary”) sends and returns. In this article, we’ll take a closer look at these important controls.

Aux Sends

When doing live sound, microphone inputs are typically sent to the left/right or main mix. This makes a lot of sense because we want to hear those sounds in the PA system. However, there are times when you may also need to send a signal somewhere else — like, for example, to an effects processor such as a reverb or delay unit. That’s the primary purpose of an aux send. Aux sends are sometimes labeled with different names such as “effects send,” “FX send,” MON (short for “monitor”) or even “foldback,” but they all work the same way: They serve as a secondary output from a channel that routes the signal to a place other than the main left and right speakers.

Depending upon the mixer, aux sends may be “internal,” meaning that they send a signal to an onboard effects processor like the one in the Yamaha MG10XU. In other cases, aux sends are “external,” meaning that they feed signal completely out of the mixer to another device altogether. In the case of the latter, there will be physical output jacks on the mixer (usually on the rear panel) that enable you to connect whatever external devices you want to receive this signal.

Suppose you want to add reverb to a vocal microphone that’s plugged into your mixer. The channel it’s connected to is already feeding the vocal to the left and right speakers. It would be silly to take the left and right outputs from the mixer and connect them to a reverb unit because (a) it would be impractical, and (b) you’d get reverb on every channel — probably not a good thing. This is where an aux send comes in.

You’ve probably heard the term signal flow. It’s particularly apt because it implies that an audio signal is like water. Using this analogy, you can think of a mixer channel as the main pipe — the one that takes the signal from the vocal mic to the left/right mix. An aux send is like a small “tap” used to divert a bit of the signal — just like a plumber uses a valve and piping from the water main to get water into your kitchen … although, of course, once that valve is added, it can be connected via piping to anywhere in the house. It’s the same with an audio signal. Just like the valves on a water main, one channel can feed many aux sends.

Let’s take a look at a simple example. The illustration below shows part of a channel in the MG10XU. You can see at the top that there is a knob labeled FX. This is an aux send dedicated to the mixer’s internal FX processor. When you turn up this knob, signal from the channel is routed into the mixer’s internal FX. The main LEVEL knob (the one on the bottom) still controls the amount of signal going to the left/right mix. If we turn up both knobs, the signal from that channel goes to two places at the same time.

Diagram showing settings.
MG10XU channel.

It’s important to realize that the channels on a mixer share aux sends. For example, all of the channels on the MG10XU have access to the same FX processor “bus.” (A bus is an audio path that brings multiple signals to the same place at the same time — just like a city bus takes a lot of people to the same work location in the morning.) Even though all the channels share the bus, you use the aux send knobs to independently control the amount of effect for each individual channel.

Using Aux Sends to Create Monitor Mixes

As mentioned previously, some mixers have output jacks for the aux sends, allowing you to send signal to external devices. These devices could be effects processors … or they could be stage monitors.

As shown in the illustration below, the Yamaha MGP12X offers four different aux sends, each with a separate TRS output on the rear panel of the mixer:

Diagram of knob settings.
MGP12X aux sends.

To set up an onstage monitor for, say, the lead singer, simply connect a cable from the MGP12X Aux 1 Send output jack to the input of a powered speaker such as the Yamaha DBR10:

Diagram.
Aux out to onstage monitor.

When you then turn up the Aux 1 knobs on different channels, they “get on the bus” and go to the Aux 1 output jack, then to the monitor:

Diagram.
Aux send bus to onstage monitor.

If your mixer has multiple external aux sends, you can create separate monitor mixes for different musicians, as shown below:

Diagram.
Aux send busses to multiple onstage monitors.

Aux send 4 on the MGP12X is labeled “FX” and is typically used to feed external effect processors such as a digital delay or reverb:

Aux send bus to external effects processor.

As we’ll see shortly, the processor’s output must be connected to an aux/effects return or a spare input channel in order to add it back into the signal path.

Pre-Fader vs. Post-Fader

If you’re paying attention, you may have noticed that some aux sends have the word PRE next to them. This refers to whether the send is taking its signal pre-fader (i.e., before the fader) or post-fader (after the fader).

What’s the difference? Let’s go back to the water analogy. Imagine there’s a valve that turns the water on and off in your kitchen. If you turn off that valve you will never get any water from the kitchen faucet. If you crack open that valve just a little bit, you only get a trickle of water from the kitchen faucet. If you open the valve all the way, you can get a strong flow of water from the faucet. That’s how a post-fader send works. The valve is the fader, and the faucet is a post-fader send. If you shut off the fader (the valve), the send (the kitchen faucet) doesn’t work anymore.

Thankfully, the valve in your bathroom is in a different place. It’s before the kitchen valve, so even if you shut off the kitchen valve you still have water to shower with. That’s how a pre-fader send works. Even if you lower the fader all the way down, you can still turn up a pre-fader send.

So why have both?

Generally, post-fader sends are used for effects, so that when you raise or lower the fader, the effect send level is also raised or lowered. In other words, the effect stays in proportion to the “dry” sound.

Pre-fader sends are usually used for monitor (or headphone) mixes so that when you raise or lower a channel in the left/right mix, the monitor mix does not change. This is important because a musician may want their monitor mix to be different from the mix that the audience hears. A musician might, for example, hear enough guitar from a loud onstage amp and not need it in their monitor, but you still might need to put a little bit of guitar in the PA system for the audience to hear it clearly.

Sometimes an aux send can be switched to be pre- or post-fader (for example, Aux 2 on the Yamaha MGP12X), making it usable as either an effects send or a monitor send. However, most of the time sends are “fixed” to either pre- or post-fader and you can’t change that — so you’ll want to choose carefully which you use for effects (again, usually post-fader) and which you use for monitors (usually pre-fader).

Finally, most aux outputs have a Send Master knob that controls the overall level of the bus, making it easy to adjust the volume of the mix without disturbing the balance between the different channels:

Diagram.
MGP12X aux sends masters.

Aux Returns

Of course, after you send signal into a processor (whether it’s an internal one or an external device), you still have to bring it back (return it) to the left/right mix so that you can hear the effect. That’s the purpose of an aux return (sometimes called an effect return or FX return), which you can think of it as being a kind of mini-input. In some cases, it may have only a knob for level and an on/off switch, as on the entry-level Yamaha MG10XU mixer. Here, all you have to do to hear the effect is raise the FX RTN LEVEL knob:

Diagram.
MG10XU FX RTN
(FX Return).

Contrast this with the FX return on the more advanced MGP12X:

Diagram.
MGP12X FX Return.

Here, a fader is used for more accurate level control, plus there are on/off and bus assignment switches (we’ll discuss these in a future Tools of the Trade blog posting) and three Aux Send knobs: Aux 1, Aux 2 and Aux 3. Yes, these aux send controls enable you to send the FX return itself into any or all of the three different aux sends. Sound crazy? Not really. This configuration allows you to add effects into the monitor mixes — a really nice feature for singers who like a bit of reverb or echo in their monitors.

Note that aux returns can also be used as spare inputs. If you have a smartphone, tablet or computer at your FOH (Front Of House) position that you want to use to play music in-between sets, an aux return is a good place to connect it since it leaves all your input channels free for microphones or instruments onstage.

 

Check out our other Tools of the Trade postings.

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha mixing consoles.

Crafting Your Signature Guitar Sound

Musicians are often gifted with additional creative talents such as fine art painting, photography and/or graphic design. We can use these skills to produce our own gig posters and to build websites and social media platforms — all of the essential marketing tools that we need to promote our music.

The author seated in an ornate hallway with his guitar.

I’m trained as an interior designer and decorative painter and have always drawn, painted and designed my own marketing materials. I’ve learned how to publish my own websites and take compelling photographs, as well as how to use color to build brand recognition as an independent artist on my YouTube, Instagram and Facebook channels. Most importantly, these skills ensure that my career is not misrepresented by outside sources.

The instruments, amps and pedals we choose to create our music are all extensions of our brand too. Guitar shapes, styles and colors often suggest the genre of music we play, and while the amps and pedalboards we use for live performance sometimes vary from studio session rigs, the overall tones they produce should nonetheless support the sound of our brand. For that reason, I like to think of these elements as “sub-brands” of our global artistic vision.

I workshop with a lot of guitar players who are still searching for that elusive individualistic tone, and my advice to them is to understand who you are first. When you know who you are and what your vision is, you can go about achieving it. Choose instruments and gear that support your vision … and not by what it says on the headstock!

I’ve chosen to play Yamaha Revstar guitars through a Line 6 Helix® processor for my studio sessions, live gigs and workshop clinics, not because they “give me” my sound but because they support my tonal brand and are faithful conduits for my musical voice. The fact that they look and sound cool is an added bonus!

Three electric guitars lined up.

The “Cafe Racer”-inspired Revstar guitars sport hand-rubbed flame maple top finishes and brushed nickel hardware for a retro-modern appeal. Not only does this blend well with my image and style of music, I’m inspired by how the guitars feel and sound when I play them, making them the perfect conduit for my creativity.

So if the products we use, the clothes we wear and our social media marketing presence are all part of our universal brand, shouldn’t our guitar playing style, phrasing and tone represent the same trademark standards?

We all have the opportunity, as individuals, to forge our own musical brand … and only part of that comes from the use of particular guitars, amps and pedals. In my opinion, most of our tonal identity actually comes from within: our touch, note choices, chord voicings and rhythmic phrasing.

At my workshops, I discuss and demonstrate a series of conceptual ideas that I believe can help you develop your own personal musical brand, style and voice on the guitar. Here’s a video that will allow you to explore some of those ideas.

The Video

Let the Chords Do the Work

The chord progression in the backing track to this video is quite straightforward: D – Bm7 – G – D, with two measures (bars) on each chord. This creates an eight-measure progression that resolves nicely to the tonal center of D major (D Ionian).

Over these chords, I’m playing notes from the D major scale and, initially, I’m simply repeating the same melodic phrase. Despite the repetition, you’ll notice that the melody takes on a new flavor each time the chords change. I call this “letting the chords do the work.” Even though the melody notes are the same each time, their relationship to the underlying chord varies and thus produces a different musical emotion. This is a great way to construct a solo and create a memorable experience for your audience.

Motifs

Motifs are simple melodic phrases that are played repeatedly. In pop music these are often referred to as “hooks.” There are tons of them in this demo — musical ideas that I recap to produce familiarity for the listener. I often tell guitar players to stop throwing away their ideas when they improvise and try developing simple motifs that can be phrased and re-phrased.

Phrasing

Phrasing is the rhythmic delivery of your melodic message. You can successfully replay the same notes over and over again by changing their rhythmic aspect, or even by simply starting the phrase in a new location within the bar.

Check out the video again and focus on where I place phrases within each bar. On my opening line I start the phrase on the downbeat of 1; then, when I repeat the motif over the next two chords I start the phrase on the upbeat of 1. This is called melodic/rhythmic displacement, and it often has the added benefit of making your licks sound cooler too!

Keep listening and you’ll hear me dramatically change where I place the phrases each time as I move through this solo. I’m getting as much musical mileage out of my phrases as possible by letting the chords do the work and by manipulating the note values each time.

The Wrap-Up

These are just a few creative ways to develop your musical identity and craft your signature sound. Don’t rely on your gear to provide the marketing magic: Let your creative approach to performance be the key to standing out in the crowd.

Photographs courtesy of the author.

Check out Robbie’s other postings.

Stage Fright

I’ve written about popular music for nearly forty years, and performance is perhaps the subject that excites me most about it. I’ve always been fascinated by the transformation that occurs when someone takes that last magical step onto the stage, whether in a club, a theater, an arena or a stadium. Once at a U2 show in Albany, NY, I was talking to Bono backstage, and he suddenly said, “Walk with me for a minute.” I thought to myself, Where are we going? Isn’t the show starting soon? Then he stopped talking, gave me a quick hug, said “Great seeing you!” and ran out onto the stage in front of a roaring arena crowd.

Picture of Lou Reed with his name overlaid.

“How does he do that?” I wondered. How do you go from having a casual conversation to leading a band and whipping an audience into a frenzy? Well, recently, I’ve had the opportunity to find out, albeit on a much smaller level. When I published a biography of Lou Reed in 2017, I received many invitations to speak. Often those invitations were accompanied by a request that I also try to line up musicians to play some of Lou’s songs. Graciously, Suzanne Vega, singer-songwriter Richard Barone and guitarist Jeff Ross (who played with Lou on Street Hassle and Take No Prisoners) all agreed to perform when I launched the book at an event at the 92nd Street Y in New York City. We met for a rehearsal the day before the event, and I made a surprise request: I wanted to join them onstage.

I hadn’t really sung in public since my high school band played a church auditorium back in the Sixties. But I can carry a tune, and let’s face it, you don’t exactly need to be Pavarotti to make your way through a Lou Reed song. I’d missed some chances over the years to do something like this because I was too shy or too scared. As with so many things in life as you get older, I thought, if not now, when? After that, we were a band.

At the Y we traded verses on “I’m Waiting for the Man” and “Walk on the Wild Side,” and I sang background on the four other songs we performed. The audience loved it, and I’d been bitten by the bug. A few months later, Richard invited me to sing “I’m Waiting for the Man” with him, Jeffrey Gaines and Steve Addabbo at World Café Live in Philadelphia. Then the Andy Browne Troupe offered to back me up on a full set of Lou Reed songs at the 529 Club in Atlanta. I immediately said yes, but as the date approached, the prospect of singing lead on fifteen songs backed by a nine-piece band was terrifying. Just putting together the set list had been an education. I started by doing what I always have done: think like a critic. I need to represent every phase of Lou’s career responsibly, I told myself. And — heaven forfend! — I certainly didn’t want to rely exclusively on Lou’s best-known songs; my selections needed to be much cooler than that.

When I began rehearsing, however, all my criteria boiled down to exactly one: How well can I sing this song? That was the first of many lessons I learned about the difference between being a performer and being a critic. Nobody was going to stand in the audience and think, “That vocal sucked, but what a clever song choice!” The show was either going to work, or it wasn’t. Consequently, no matter how important a song was, if I couldn’t do a good job of delivering it, it was off the list.

Large band on stage.
Channeling Lou with the Andy Browne Troupe at the 529 Club in Atlanta.

I wasn’t coming to Lou’s music cold, of course. I knew him personally, wrote about and interviewed him many times, and spent more than three years working to piece together his life story. But singing his songs has profoundly deepened my appreciation for his artistry. He often doesn’t sound as if he’s doing much as a singer, but when you try to get inside his songs and replicate his performances, you realize how much intelligence and restraint go into making it seem that easy. Musicians in bands I’ve written about over the years about have joked endlessly with me about the pretensions and extravagant expectations of their lead singers. But doing it has taught me so much about the confidence you need to get up there and be the front man. It’s a rush like nothing I’ve ever felt, but also a risk. Feeling that exposed is no joke. For all that musicians complain about the perils of LSD — lead singer’s disease — bands ultimately look to the singer to define the performance. It quickly became clear to me that the more energy I put into my delivery and the more I responded to what the players were doing, the stronger they kicked in behind me.

Man singing on stage.
Performing at The Shrine in Harlem.

But the biggest rush is the camaraderie you feel with the band — and the power they give you. The first time I was backed by a full band was at the Four Quarter Bar in North Little Rock, and when they leaned into the opening of “Sweet Jane,” I got so excited I almost forgot to sing! I quickly focused, though, and learned how self-assured a great band can make you feel, how much you want to step up to meet their standard.

This may sound immodest, but the fact of the matter is that the Andy Browne Troupe and I killed at that show in Atlanta. Sure, I slipped up here and there, but I learned how to trust that the band would catch me — and at the same time push me to keep going even harder.

Believe me, I’m not quitting my day job. I know where my true talents lie. But the confidence I’ve gained as a result of these experiences is yet another gift that music has given me — a gift I never anticipated, and one that’s proven as valuable to me off the stage as on it.

Photos courtesy of Little, Brown; Lucy Browne; and Dmitry Kiper (@dmitrysea).

Dolby Atmos® Is Coming to Apple TV® 4K

Movie lovers rejoice! Apple TV® 4K now features Dolby Atmos®. Apple shared the exciting news at its 2018 Worldwide Developers Conference (WWDC), noting that iTunes® would be carrying a huge selection of Dolby Atmos movies — a major enhancement to the nation’s fourth most popular streaming service.

Dolby Atmos is, of course, widely used in movie theaters. Many blockbusters, including Avengers: Infinity War and Incredibles 2, use this object-based audio technology to create sound effects that totally envelope you, making movie watching a thoroughly immersive experience.

How does Dolby Atmos translate to your home theater environment? Here are four reasons to be excited:

1. Most popular movies are in Dolby Atmos. In addition to past and present hits, a slew of theatrical releases now feature Dolby Atmos. Check out the release calendar on the Dolby website.

2. It’s more approachable than you’d think. You don’t need a room full of speakers to benefit from Dolby Atmos. (But you do need a Dolby Atmos-capable AV receiver such as a Yamaha AVENTAGE model or a sound bar such as the Yamaha TRUE X BAR 50A.) Whether your home theater is an AV receiver with nine speakers and a subwoofer, or just a sound bar, Dolby Atmos adjusts soundtracks to get the most enveloping surround sound from your speaker configuration.

3. It’s more than movies. Dolby Atmos content is available on Blu-ray Disc™, streaming services (soon including Apple TV) and video games, including popular games such as Gears of War 4 and Overwatch. Its combination of advanced spatial precision and immersive 3D surround sound lets you hear enemies approaching from behind you and soaring overhead, making your gaming experience more real than ever. Click here for more information about video games that support Dolby Atmos.

4. Existing content gets a boost too. Even your existing content that isn’t developed with Dolby Atmos will sound better, thanks to a new surround upmixer in Dolby Atmos AV receivers, which expands channel-based content created for stereo, 5.1- and 7.1-channel systems.

To take advantage of Dolby Atmos at home, all you have to do is connect your Apple TV 4K to a Dolby Atmos-capable AV receiver or sound bar for audio decoding.

Technological advancements are bringing the home theater experience closer to the movie theater experience than ever before, just without the sticky floors and the guy texting next to you!

 

Yamaha brought this game-changing technology to home theaters with the first sound bar to feature Dolby Atmos, the TRUE X BAR 50A. In addition, all Yamaha AVENTAGE AV receivers feature three-dimensional surround sound decoding with Dolby Atmos.

To learn more about the technology behind Dolby Atmos, see our blog article “What’s So Good About Dolby Atmos® and DTS:X™?

Vibraphone Lessons with Rusty Burge, Part 3: Basic Jazz Voicings

Here’s the third and final installment in our series of video lessons on vibraphone performance technique by Yamaha Performing Artist Rusty Burge.

Unlike the piano, the vibraphone player only has four mallets to create jazz voicings when comping chords. The young improviser must learn these foundations of voicings and voice leading to be able to successfully comp chords during solos. In this video, Rusty introduces basic jazz vibraphone voicings:

We suggest you begin with a two-note voicing. In this video example, Professor Burge uses the 3rd and 7th note of the chord. Once you are comfortable playing the 3rd and 7th notes of the chord, add a third note and then eventually the fourth note. (The video provides a number of accompanying musical examples.) Once you are comfortable playing the voices in all 12 keys, practice alterations to the dominant chord to add more color to the voicing, as shown in the video.

Rusty Burge is Professor of Percussion at the Cincinnati College-Conservatory of Music and is also a member of Percussion Group Cincinnati, with whom he has performed extensively throughout North America, Europe and Asia. He was formerly principal percussionist with the West Virginia Symphony and plays extra with the Cincinnati Symphony. Burge received his undergraduate degree from the Eastman School of Music and a master’s degree from CCM, where he teaches percussion and jazz vibraphone in addition to directing the CCM Steel band. He has performed with Peter Erskine, Ted Nash, Rich Perry, Dave Liebman, Rufus Reid, Steve Allee, Roland Vazquez and Michael Spiro. His new book, Method for Vibraphone, will be released this coming fall.

Click here for Part 1 in this series: Pedaling Technique and Grips.

Click here for Part 2 in this series: Using Patterns in Improvisation.

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha vibraphones.

Good Morning, Good Morning

There’s a specific time of day when each of us is most focused and prolific. Knowing your personal optimum time will serve you well, especially if you’re a writer — a writer of music, lyrics, books, journals, blogs, anything.

Woman sitting on a deck with a cup of coffee and her guitar.

For me it’s MORNING MORNING MORNING. While my brain is calm and clear. Before that little voice in my head starts bossing me around and the clutter of extraneous thought accumulates. Thoughts such as:

  • I wonder if these eyelash extensions are working for me?
  • I’m so tired of throwing money away on bad watermelons
  • I can’t believe he didn’t consult me before he “machete’d” my bangs
  • What’s the weather like? Where am I? What year is it?

Ya know — life.

This clutter is to my brain as plaque is to my teeth.

The ideal order of all-things-morning for me (after a few minutes of enjoying the ceiling fan whirling overhead) goes like this:

  • Slippers or Clogs?
  • Coffee (with 1% milk microwaved for exactly 60 seconds)
  • NPR
  • Play a round of Words With Friends with my buddy Kevin Cronin

Then I glide into my office and fire up the laptop. I tap for about an hour. A lyric. A blog. Whatever needs release.

As soon as there’s a lull in enthusiasm I remind myself to STOP. Because sometimes I forget that in extending that first hour, I pass the point of optimum productivity.

Protein shake? Yes, please, at least on weekdays. Yogurt +  banana + coconut water. That’s it. I don’t need other stuff. There’s too much kitchen choreography involved in chopping parsley and juicing apple cores. Having the same breakfast five days a week saves me the three minutes involved in making a decision about an alternative. Time is precious. There’s never enough. Especially on days when I’m inspired. Eggs are something I save for the weekend.

Then … to the gym I trudge. It’s a hate/love thing in that order. I dread having to allocate the hour, but it doesn’t take long before I remember that movement helps digest work (and protein shakes). The “love” part is when I’m finished — when I return to my computer and realize everything is flowing more freely. Thank you, treadmill. It’s all your fault.

Next … errands. I suggest doing the one you’re resisting the most first, lest the procrastination hold you back in more ways than one. If you have no errands (who has no errands?) then go for a drive. If you live in a city, go for a walk. In other words, give your brain a break.

The irony is that our brain is working extra diligently during the break. I’m no psychologist but I’ve been writing long enough to have noticed. When I pull back into my driveway I’m searching madly for a receipt on which to scribble details that emerged from within while sitting at a red light: a superior verb, a rhyme I hadn’t considered before I left the house. It’s the letting go. I’m sure of it.

Hand poised with finger extended above a laptop keyboard ready to press a key with the sun going down in background.

Soon it’s time for shutting down. Hey, a girl’s gotta rest.

There are tons of us who would reject the morning as their creative sweet spot in favor of the mid-afternoon, following a cat nap. Good luck to you. That’s when I’m thinking about my martini.

Others would prefer the evening — after all the chores are done, dinner dishes washed and school lunches packed. Good luck to you too. That’s guilty pleasure TV time for me, followed by a bubble bath, after which I go directly to sleep so I can rise again at 6 a.m. and start again.

So these are my Words of Wisdom for the month: Pay attention to and honor thy mental peaks and valleys. And if you have the freedom to do so, arrange your schedule around them. You’ll get more done and have more fun doing it.

That’s it for now. 5 p.m.? I’m ready for my cocktail, Mr. DeMille.

Talk to you in the morning.

 

Check out Shelly’s other postings.

 

A Brief Guide to Acoustic Guitar Tonewoods

The best acoustic guitars are made out of wood. This remains as much a truism in the 21st century as it was in the 18th, despite huge recent advances in the development of alternative guitar materials (particularly carbon-fiber). There are three reasons why:

  1. Wood resonates better
  2. Its tone improves with age
  3. It looks good

Although what constitutes a great-sounding (and great-looking) guitar comes down to personal taste, there is general agreement on what the best tonewoods are for acoustic guitar making. In this article, we’ll take a look at four key wood families — spruce, rosewood, mahogany, and “exotics” like bear claw spruce, cocobolo and koa — and talk about how Yamaha makes use of each of these.

Spruce

This evergreen, found in northern temperate regions of the globe, is literally top choice: the ideal wood for the soundboard, or top, of an acoustic guitar. Its look — light in color, even in grain — is appealing though somewhat plain; what sets it apart is its beautiful tonal properties. Acoustic guitars made with spruce are an excellent choice for a player with a softer touch as they respond well to that kind of touch — they don’t sound quite as good when played aggressively.

Sitka spruce, from Canada and Alaska, and Engleman spruce from British Columbia get especially high marks from the luthiers at Yamaha. Sitka is slightly harder than the average spruce, while Engleman is somewhat softer, but both are prized for their distinctively rich mid and low range. Ezo spruce from Hokkaido, Japan, is also highly regarded, but depleted resources have made it hard to obtain new supplies.

Rosewood

Named for its distinctive sweet smell, rosewood is hard but porous and a natural choice for the back and sides of an acoustic guitar. It has the double advantage of looking gorgeous (it comes in an astonishing range of browns and purples) and sounding rich, warm and loud. Rosewood provides great mid-range as well as deep bass and bright treble. It also offers rich overtones and a high “response rate” that makes for a sharp attack and a lot of resonance.

Unfortunately, its popularity has led to near-extinction in some parts of the world. Brazilian rosewood, a luthier’s favorite for generations, is now listed as an official endangered species, meaning that no new supplies can be made available for sale and international trade of any sort is heavily restricted. Yamaha uses its remaining stock of this wood very selectively; favored alternatives include Indian and Honduran rosewood, which tend to be more purplish with coarser grain markings.

Mahogany

This hardwood is the most commonly used wood for musical instruments because it’s durable, easy to work with and wonderfully resonant (though it doesn’t have the sonic brilliance of rosewood). Like rosewood, it’s employed principally for guitar backs and sides, as well as fingerboards and bridges, though all-mahogany models are not uncommon.

Mahogany produces a strong, earthy midrange tonality with subtle overtones, making for a sound that is often described as “non-abrasive.” Mahogany top guitars are great for playing blues and are also an excellent choice in situations where you are playing with other instruments, since they cut through so well.

The Cuban, Honduran, and Mexican varieties of mahogany are all classified as being “at risk but not presently threatened with extinction.” International trade of these is regulated accordingly, making them more expensive. In keeping with its aim to be environmentally responsible, Yamaha makes very little use of these woods; its luthiers currently instead favor mahogany from Africa.

The coupling of a spruce top with rosewood or mahogany back and sides is a tough combination to beat, because the results consistently sound so good. However, other options arguably have more visual appeal: North American flame maple, for instance, as well as figured ash, bubinga, and the following “exotics.”

Exotics

Bear claw spruce may not look all that exotic at first glance, but what puts it in this category is its rarity. Basically, it’s spruce with stretch marks, caused by particularly slow and/or stressful tree growth conditions. Some players love these unusual patterns, while others find them visually distracting. The tone of bear claw, which has been used in limited-edition versions of A Series acoustic-electric guitars by Yamaha (such as the A3R BC and AC3R BC), is pretty much what you’d expect from spruce: clear and powerful.

Cocobolo, a dense hardwood from Central America, is stunning in its figuration and color range (from red to black). It also produces a deep sound, with a quick attack and lengthy sustain. Though not often used by Yamaha, it’s become a popular wood for acoustic guitar backs and sides.

Koa, another extremely dense wood, comes from Hawaii and therefore is never in huge supply. Its striking golden color and strong grain markings make it unique and equally good for guitar tops, backs and sides. Its sound is well-balanced but on the soft side — best suited to finger picking. For this reason, guitars made with Koa are geared more toward a living room than a large stage.

Koa is one of those woods that sounds better with time. A guitar with a Koa soundboard will start out life with a very bright sound. But as it ages (the more it is played) it will mellow out and become richer and warmer sounding, with more emphasis of midrange tones.

Yamaha has produced three Koa acoustic guitar models to date, all of them limited-edition: the CSF-100K parlor guitar, of which only 100 were made roughly 15 years ago; the original A Series A4K dreadnought and AC4K concert, introduced more than five years ago; and the new all-solid Hawaiian A4K and AC4K, which will be limited to 150 pieces in the U.S. market:

Two acoustic guitars.

Of course, the wood itself — purchased from the world’s best suppliers — is only one element that distinguishes Yamaha acoustic guitars. For example, because Yamaha owns all of its production facilities, it can store wood in its own climate-controlled space without having to outsource the crucial drying phase. Kiln use is minimal; most wood for Yamaha guitars is instead subject to two different but related natural processes: aging, to cut down moisture content; and seasoning, to stabilize the wood. The end result is a guitar that sounds as beautiful as it looks.

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha acoustic guitars.

DonorsChoose Helps Provide Quality Music Education

In my more than 30 years working in music education, I have observed a great deal of change. However, one constant is the overwhelming impact that music teachers have on the overall success of their students.  The positive influence a good teacher can have on students’ daily lives is undeniable. Regardless of socioeconomic status or school district, it is clear that students who participate in high-quality music programs score higher on reading and spelling tests.1 We also know that students who study music tend to have larger vocabularies and more advanced reading skills than their peers who do not participate in music lessons.2 There are a whole host of benefits to a quality music education, including building a sense of identity, preserving or restoring social capital, and strengthening social networks in communities.3 In a perfect world, our nation’s public school music teachers would be uniformly well-funded, but unfortunately that is not the case.

DonorsChoose: Crowdfunding for Teachers

Research shows that music teachers are spending roughly $1,000 annually out of their own pockets to fund their classrooms and improve the experience of their students. One important resource that can ease their burden is the online teacher-led crowdfunding site DonorsChoose.org, which has been accessed by one in four teachers in the United States. Yamaha has set up a matching offer to help music teachers buy the supplies they need to provide quality music education to all students, regardless of zip code or ability to pay.

Seeing the Impact Firsthand

drum head that says

Not long ago, members of the Yamaha Band & Orchestral team visited a classroom in McKees Rocks, PA, just outside of Pittsburgh. There, they met Mrs. Suellen Engelhard, who teaches general music and band classes to high-energy middle school students at Sto-Rox Junior Senior High School. More than three quarters of her students come from low-income households. They regularly deal with violence and rough situations outside the classroom, so music class is a place they come to connect with their passions and build important friendships.

The school’s band room was equipped with a variety of inherited instruments that were very old and in disrepair — some to the point of being unusable. Mrs. Engelhard was buying the reeds, drumheads and other accessories herself, but with limited funding from her school district, it was becoming a challenge to keep up. Through our partnership with DonorsChoose.org, Yamaha found a way to fund some of the school’s basic needs and provide new and improved ligatures, mallets and reeds, all of which would make those instruments playable again.

How You Can Help

Yamaha is honored to be able to support music teachers whose efforts make a huge difference in the lives of our nation’s young people. You can make a difference in your own community and change the lives of young people through music. Take a look at the projects on DonorsChoose.org to see how a small contribution can make a world of difference, right in your own backyard.

Watch Mrs. Engelhard’s story:

 

1 Hille, Katrin, et al. “Associations between music education, intelligence, and spelling ability in elementary school.” Adv Cogn Psychol 7 (2011): 1–6. Web.
2 “Statistical benefits of music in education.” Arete Music Academy.
3 Arts in Aging report from the National Endowment for the Arts. http://www.cms.msu.edu/docs/BenefitsMusic-Adult.pdf.

Tuning Tips for Marching Percussion

Marching percussion is one of the most demanding categories of instruments in terms of equipment wear and tear. Because they are primarily used outdoors, well-tuned drums are necessary to allow the maximum projection of sound. In addition, a conscientious schedule of regular maintenance and tuning will extend the life of each instrument. The pitches recommended in this article serve as a reference for achieving superior projection and tone quality.

Find the right pitch for your drum and keep it there. Don’t get into the habit of tightening the drumhead every time you play it, and remember: It needs to be tuned, not necessarily tightened. Even though new heads require a short break-in period, modern materials are extremely resilient and tend to hold pitch longer if they are always returned to the desired pitch at every session. Stay consistent and check the drum pitch often, especially when the head is new. Far better to check the head daily and make small adjustments than to wait a week and make a large adjustment in tensioning.

Finally, change heads when the tone has gone “dead,” not just when you break them!

Maintenance Tips

  • Keep tension rods lubricated with lithium grease, petroleum jelly or a premium valve oil. Carefully remove exposed lubricant, as it can attract dirt and damage threads. Replace worn or lost nylon and metal washers.
  • Lubricating wood bearing edges with a thin coat of paraffin or cork grease will ease high-tension tuning and help prevent moisture from seeping into the shell.
  • Pre-tighten each tension rod with your fingers only. With a drum key, use a crisscross tuning sequence for plastic heads and a clockwise procedure for Kevlar® heads to properly seat the head. Tighten each rod, no more than one full turn at a time, until the drum is brought into its proper range.
  • Fine tune the head to the same pitch in front of each tension rod.
  • Change heads at the end of practice and let them sit overnight before you play on them again.
  • Practice with well-tuned drums. Don’t wait until a performance to tune.
  • Cover all your drums during rehearsals with marching drum covers to prevent scratches that can occur when learning your drill movements.
  • Cases must be used when transporting or storing your drums. Don’t keep sticks, music folders, carriers or other objects in the case. They can cause damage to the heads and shell!

Marching Snares

A Kevlar or a plastic, dotted batter (top) head is recommended, along with a plastic bottom head. Make sure to check often for loose tension rods especially on the bottom side; gravity guards can be used to prevent neglected tension rods from falling out. Tune each individual snare strand to a uniform pitch using a “plucked string” method:

  • Adjust the individual strands at the butt place with a screwdriver.
  • Turn clockwise to tighten and counter clockwise to loosen individual strands.
  • Use the vertical control knobs to get the snares flush with the bottom head at the bearing edge.
  • Then, while playing the batter head, use the horizontal control knob to gradually tighten the entire snare unit to a crisp articulation.
Single drum for playing while marching.

Marching Toms

Pinstripe heads without dots are recommended. Marching toms in a set are usually tuned a minor third apart to give a feeling of melodic movement between drums. These instruments tend to attract more dirt since they have no bottom heads, so keep marching tom guards on the bottom edges of all drums to protect them.

Set of two marching drums.

Marching Bass Drums

Smooth white heads are recommended for bass drums, as they produce the most desirable fundamental tone and are visually effective in drill patterns. Bass drums in a set are usually tuned a minor third to a perfect fifth apart to give a feeling of melodic movement between drums. If you need to eliminate unwanted overtones and ring, apply a length of Yamaha Sound Impact Strips™ around the perimeter of the bass drum head.

One bass drum for marching.

There are limitless combinations of pitches and tuning variations for marching drums, with endless ways to muffle and dampen them. All depend on the style of the ensemble and personal preference, but carefully planned tuning and dampening are critical to the development of your percussion section and can help increase the musical effectiveness of the entire marching ensemble.

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha marching drums.

Click here for more information about Yamaha marching drum accessories.

Yanny vs. Laurel: Perception Is Reality

In a previous posting, I discussed the physical aspects of how a sound is created. This month, I want to talk about the other half of the equation: the way we perceive a sound.

A circle that seems to be changing size because it is an optical illusion.

Most of us are familiar with optical illusions — visual anomalies that seem real, but are in fact just trickery. Two examples that are part of our everyday lives are television and movies, both of which are actually a series of still pictures moving so fast that we perceive motion that isn’t actually there. Or check out the image on the right. Does it seem as though some of the black and dark gray circles in the middle are moving? They’re not. This isn’t an animated GIF, or a video: it’s just a plain old JPEG. But due to the physiology of our eyeballs and optic nerves, many people will swear that those circles are pulsating.

There’s an argument to be made that if you see motion, then there is motion, even if the facts say otherwise. It’s a hypothesis that can be summed up in three words: Perception is reality.

Or are only facts reality … even if your perception says otherwise?

I happen to suffer (well, “suffer” is really too strong a word) from a mild form of something called deuteranomaly — a fancy word for the common affliction of being red-green color blind. Most brown objects appear green to me, and a lot of green objects appear beige, brown or even black, depending upon how light or dark they are. This has been the source of endless debate with my Significant Other, who once stopped me from purchasing what I believed was a cool-looking mint green car on the grounds that she wouldn’t be caught dead riding around in a vehicle she described as being painted a “nauseating shade of putty.”

Yet that car was green to me, despite what S.O. (and, according to her, the rest of the world) thought.

Side by side blocks of different colors.

So was it a cool shade of lime green, or a nauseating shade of putty? The battle rages on. But the point is that the eye can definitely play tricks on the brain. Did you know the ear can, too?

Sure you do, at least if you expressed any interest in the Yanny/Laurel meme that was consuming social media not long ago. In case you were hiding in a cave, here’s what the fuss was all about:

What did you hear? “Yanny”? Or “Laurel”?

If you listened to it on your smartphone or earbuds, you probably heard “Yanny.” But if you listened on a reasonable quality speaker — even a small computer speaker — you most likely heard “Laurel.”

What the heck is going on here?

Let’s take a look at the facts. This was actually a recording of an actor saying the word “laurel,” created for the dictionary entry of the same name on the vocabulary.com website. However, if you listen to the high frequency content in the recording alone — which would happen when listening on earbuds or poor-quality speakers incapable of reproducing low frequency content — it sounds eerily like the word “Yanny” instead. (Whoever this Yanny guy actually is.)

Don’t believe me? Check out the New York Times online tool that lets you literally dial in the point at which Laurel magically changes to Yanny. (There’s also a good explanation there about how this whole craze likely got started.)

This is a great example of an auditory illusion. Another famous one is the Shepard Tone, named after cognitive scientist Roger Shepard. This is a sound consisting of a series of simple sine waves (pure tones with no overtones) an octave apart but with the bass pitch moving upward or downward. It creates the illusion of a tone that continually ascends or descends in pitch, yet ultimately seems to get no higher or lower — an endless scale that in some people induces queasiness or even headaches. If you’re as much of an auditory nerd as composer Hans Zimmer (who famously used Shepard Tones to great effect in the film Dunkirk to create the sense of ever-increasing intensity across intertwined storylines) and you feel like playing around with this on your own, you can find a way cool interactive online ST generator here.

Neuroscience has proven that our auditory (and visual) perception is affected by a wide range of factors. We may think we perceive the world around us as it really is, but our brain is actually a massively complex filter, and every brain is wired slightly differently.

In other words, hearing occurs in the ear, but listening occurs between the ears. Take that into consideration the next time a parent or a friend gives you a hard time about the music you are passionate about … or the next time you feel like disparaging the tunes that they love.

 

 Check out Howard’s other postings.

Home Theater on a Budget, Part 3: Advanced System

Creating a quality home theater system requires research, dedication and planning. The first two articles in this series, Home Theater on a Budget, Part 1: Starter System and Home Theater on a Budget, Part 2: Intermediate System, offer tips and guidelines for those looking to create a quality system at an affordable price. This installment kicks it up a notch.

AV RECEIVER

AV receiver.
RX-V585 AV receiver.

There are plenty of reasons you should upgrade your receiver, but perhaps the most important is having more options. The Yamaha RX-585 AV receiver with MusicCast offers plenty of them, including a Zone B that lets you run a 5.1-channel output while mirroring that sound in a second zone and simultaneously maintaining stereo sound.

MAIN SPEAKERS

Large vertical speaker.
NS-555 floor standing speaker.

The quality of your main speakers are critical to any advanced system. Yamaha NS-555 floor standing speakers fit the bill in terms of both sound and physical size. Each speaker stands at just over three feet high, with a three-way bass reflex design ideal for home theater. Their waveguide horn also helps guide sound to your ears instead of reflecting it off the walls, which greatly improves the sense of directionality you experience.

CENTER CHANNEL SPEAKER

Horizontal speaker.
Yamaha NS-C444

You’ll want to complete the front end of your advanced home theater system with a center channel speaker designed for home theater applications. A good choice is the Yamaha NS-C444 center channel speaker. Its advanced design allows you to hear dialogue clearly without it getting lost in the surround mix behind things like explosions and car chases.

REAR SURROUND SPEAKERS

Two stereo speakers next to each other - one with the filter cover on; the other with the speaker and subwoofer exposed.
NS-333 bookshelf speakers.

For your rear surrounds, the Yamaha NS-333 bookshelf speakers are a good option. They offer a two-way bass reflex design similar to the NS-555 that picks up the nuances of any film or TV show and let you clearly hear subtle elements like footsteps coming up from behind in your favorite horror movie. If you’re using a MusicCast AV receiver such as the Yamaha RX-V585, consider using MusicCast 20 or MusicCast 50 wireless speakers as your rear surrounds so you can enjoy 5.1 sound without the hassle of running speaker wires through the floor or walls.

POWERED SUBWOOFER

Small square speaker.
Yamaha NS-SW100

Beef up your bass with the NS-SW100 powered subwoofer. Its design features Advanced YST II (Yamaha Active Servo Technology II) for stable and accurate response of everything from the rumble of action movies to the low notes in your favorite movie musical or live concert film.

If you’re setting up your own system without professional help, be sure to check out the Yamaha AV Setup Guide app, which provides step-by-step instructions for your AV receiver and system as a whole.

ACCESSORIES

Don’t forget to leave room in your budget for speaker wire, HDMI cables, speaker stands and any other accessories you may need for your system.

Once you’re done setting up, make the most of your home theater by dimming the lights and putting on a great flick. If it’s a tear-jerker, don’t forget the tissues.

Part 4 of our “Home Theater on a Budget” series, covering luxury systems, can be found here.

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha AV products.

Music to the Rescue

National PTSD Awareness Day is observed annually on June 27 to recognize the effects post-traumatic stress has on the lives of those affected by it, including roughly 800,000 veterans.

For years, Vietnam veteran Dan Van Buskirk wanted to learn to play guitar. But something was stopping him: the lasting effects of combat, in the form of Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD), which he felt would make it difficult for him to succeed.

Then one day in 2007 he met local Milwaukee guitar instructor Patrick Nettesheim and began fulfilling his dream. After only a few months of working together, the two men realized that guitar lessons were opportunities for both self-expression and positive human interaction.

Thus was born a unique organization called Guitars for Vets.

Two men seated with acoustic guitars.
Guitars for Vets co-founder Patrick Nettesheim (right) teaches Gary, the organization’s very first student, how to play guitar.

“When I first started playing,” Dan says, “I couldn’t sit still for five minutes. But just practicing the chords brought out a harmony in holding the guitar close to my chest. It felt good to my soul and it helped me sit longer and longer and longer. It’s like a very sweet meditation.

“We wouldn’t practice discord on a musical instrument,” he adds. “We practice harmony, and as we practice harmony on a musical instrument, we practice it in our lives. Music can bring peace and kindness and compassion. And that helps replace the fear and distress and anxiety that comes from being a survivor of a war.”

Many veterans not only have physical disabilities but suffer from depression and other emotional after-effects of their military service. Some become homeless or even commit suicide. The aim of G4V is to help vets on their journey to recovery, with individual and group music lessons, as well as free guitars, serving as the catalyst. Over the past seven years, the organization has expanded greatly, with 80 chapters established in 40 states and a staff that currently includes over 300 volunteers.

Upon completion of ten individualized lessons, each student is awarded a guitar pack — including a new Yamaha acoustic guitar — completely free of charge. Since becoming a proud sponsor of Guitars for Vets in 2010, Yamaha has provided over 2,000 such guitars. Graduates describe the instruments they receive and the music they learn to play as a way to ease their pain, give them focus, build their self-esteem and strengthen their sense of purpose.

Young smiling woman holding an acoustic guitar over her head.
G4V graduate Nancy Ruiz holds aloft her newly awarded Yamaha guitar.

This year, to celebrate National PTSD Awareness Day, students and graduates of the G4V Nashville chapter presented a free event at Nashville’s Benchmark Bar & Grill. They were joined onstage by guest guitarists Ali Handal, Sonny Moorman, Bobby Tomlinson and Isaac Matthews. Also taking part were G4V co-founder Patrick Nettesheim and Yamaha Corporation of America president (and avid guitarist) Tom Sumner.

Band playing music.
Tom Sumner (second from left) joins Patrick Nettesheim (far right) and G4V graduates on the Nashville stage.

“We started as just two guys with guitars visiting our brother and sister veterans in a Milwaukee VA hospital, and since then hundreds of us have found the strength to band together across the country,” says Nettesheim. “Joining forces with Yamaha has greatly extended our reach, giving us the resources to support more chapters and bring relief through music to more veterans.” Proof positive that music can indeed perform miracles!

Photographs courtesy of Andrew Feller, Levi Pervin and Guitars for Vets.

 

Click here for more information about Guitars for Vets.